Allnet ALL-SG8826MX-10G User Guide

Allnet ALL-SG8826MX-10G User Guide
24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T +
2-Port 10G SFP+ Stackable
ALL-SG8826MX-10G
User’s Manual
Default-IP
192.168.2.1
Password:
admin
FCC Warning
This Equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class-A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. It may cause harmful interference
to radio communications if the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
-
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CE Mark Warning
This is a Class-A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
2
Content
1. Products Overview ....................................................................................... 8
1.1 Major Management Features .................................................................... 9
1.2 Product Specification ............................................................................... 10
1.3 Package Contents ..................................................................................... 13
2. Hardware Description ................................................................................ 14
3. Preparation for Management ................................................................... 16
3.1 Preparation for Serial Console ................................................................ 16
3.2 Preparation for Web Interface ................................................................ 17
3.3 Preparation for Telnet/SSH Interface ...................................................... 19
4. Feature Configuration - Web UI ................................................................ 21
4.1 System Configuration .............................................................................. 21
4.1.1 System Information ............................................................................... 21
4.1.2 IP Configuration: ................................................................................... 22
4.1.3 IPv6 Configuration ................................................................................ 23
4.1.4 NTP Configuration: ............................................................................... 24
4.1.5 System Log Configuration: ................................................................... 25
4.2 Power Reduction ...................................................................................... 26
4.2.1 LED Power Reduction Configuration ................................................... 26
4.2.2 EEE Configuration: ................................................................................ 27
4.3 Port Configuration: .................................................................................. 28
4.4 Security Configuration: ............................................................................ 30
4.4.1 Security / Switch .................................................................................... 30
4.4.1.1 Security / Switch / Users Configuration ............................................. 30
4.4.1.2 Security / Switch / Privilege Levels Configuration: ............................ 31
4.4.1.3 Security / Switch / Auth Method ........................................................ 33
4.4.1.4 Security /Switch / SSH Configuration ................................................. 34
4.4.1.5 Security / Switch / HTTPS Configuration............................................ 34
4.4.1.6 Security / Switch / Access Management Configuration .................... 35
4.4.1.7 Security / Switch / SNMP..................................................................... 36
4.4.1.8 RMON Statistics Configuration .......................................................... 46
4.4.2 Security /Network .................................................................................. 52
4.4.2.1 Port Security Limit Control Configuration ........................................ 52
4.4.2.2 Security / Network / Network Access Server Configuration ............. 55
4.4.2.3 Security / Network / Access Control List Configuration .................... 63
4.4.2.4 Switch / Network / DHCP Configuration ........................................... 77
4.4.2.5 IP Source Guard Configuration ......................................................... 80
3
4.4.2.6 ARP Inspection ................................................................................... 82
4.4.3 Security / AAA Authentication Server Configuration.......................... 84
4.5 Aggregation Configuration..................................................................... 88
4.5.1 Static Aggregation ................................................................................ 88
4.5.2 LACP - Dynamic Aggregation ............................................................... 89
4.6 Loop Protection ........................................................................................ 91
4.7 Spanning Tree .......................................................................................... 93
4.7.1 Spanning Tree / Bridge Setting ............................................................. 93
4.7.2 Spanning Tree / MSTI Mapping ............................................................ 95
4.7.3 Spanning Tree / MSTI Priorities ............................................................. 96
4.7.4 Spanning Tree / CIST Ports .................................................................... 97
4.7.5 Spanning Tree MSTI Ports ..................................................................... 99
4.8 MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration) ...................................................... 101
4.9 IPMC (IP Multicast) ................................................................................. 104
4.9.1 IGMP Snooping Configuration ........................................................... 104
4.9.1.1 Basic Configuration .......................................................................... 104
4.9.1.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration .............................................. 106
4.9.1.3 IGMP Snooping / Port Group Filtering ............................................ 107
4.9.2 MLD Snooping Configuration ............................................................ 108
4.9.2.1 Basic Configuration .......................................................................... 108
4.9.2.2 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration ............................................... 109
4.9.2.3 IPMC / MLD Snooping / Port Group Filtering .................................. 111
4.10 LLDP Parameters .................................................................................. 112
4.10.1 LLDP Configuration ........................................................................... 112
4.10.2 LLDP Media Configuration ............................................................... 114
4.11 sFlow Configuration............................................................................. 123
4.12 MAC Address Table Configuration ...................................................... 126
4.13 VLAN (Virtual LAN) .............................................................................. 129
4.13.1 VLAN Membership Configuration .................................................... 129
4.13.2 VLAN Port Configuration.................................................................. 131
4.14 Private VLANs ....................................................................................... 135
4.14.1 Private VLAN Membership Configuration ....................................... 135
4.14.2 Port Isolation Configuration ............................................................. 136
4.15 VCL ........................................................................................................ 138
4.15.1 VCL / MAC-Based VLAN Configuration ............................................ 138
4.15.2 VCL / Protocol-based VLAN ............................................................... 139
4.15.3 VCL / IP Subnet-based VLAN ............................................................. 142
4.16 Voice VLAN Configuration................................................................... 144
4
4.16.1 Voice VLAN / Configuration.............................................................. 144
4.16.2 Voice VLAN / OUI Configuration ...................................................... 145
4.17 QoS ....................................................................................................... 147
4.17.1 QoS / Ingress Port Classification ....................................................... 147
4.17.2 QoS / Ingress Port Policer Config ...................................................... 148
4.17.3 QoS / Port Scheduler ......................................................................... 150
4.17.4 QoS / Egress Port Shapers ................................................................. 150
4.17.5 QoS / Port Tag Remarking ................................................................. 151
4.17.6 QoS / Port DSCP Configuration ......................................................... 152
4.17.7 QoS / DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification ................................... 154
4.17.8 QoS / DSCP Translation ...................................................................... 155
4.17.9 QoS / DSCP Classification .................................................................. 157
4.17.10 QoS / Control List Configuration .................................................... 158
4.17.11 QoS / Storm Control Configuration ................................................ 160
4.18 Mirroring Configuration ...................................................................... 162
4.19 UPnP Configuration ............................................................................. 163
4.20 Stack Configuration ............................................................................. 163
5. Feature Configuration - CLI ..................................................................... 168
5.1 System Configuration ............................................................................ 168
5.2 Power Reduction .................................................................................... 172
5.3 Port Configuration ................................................................................. 173
5.4 Security Configuration ........................................................................... 175
5.5 Aggregation Configuration................................................................... 186
5.6 Loop Protection ...................................................................................... 187
5.7 Spanning Tree ........................................................................................ 187
5.8 MVR ........................................................................................................ 189
5.9 IPMC ........................................................................................................ 190
5.10 LLDP Configuration .............................................................................. 192
5.11 sFlow Configuration............................................................................. 193
5.12 MAC Address Table Configuration ................................................... 194
5.13 VLAN Configuration .......................................................................... 194
5.14 Private VLAN Configuration ............................................................. 195
5.15 VCL Configuration ............................................................................. 195
5.16 Voice VLAN Configuration ................................................................ 197
5.17 QoS Configuration............................................................................. 198
5.18 Mirroring Configuration ................................................................... 200
5.19 UPnP Configuration ............................................................................. 201
5.20 Diagnostic Commands ....................................................................... 201
5
5.21 Maintenance Commands .................................................................. 202
6. Web Configuration - Monitor, Diagnostic, Maintenance ...................... 204
6.1 Monitor................................................................................................... 204
6.1.1 Monitor / System ................................................................................. 204
6.1.1.1 Monitor / System / Information ....................................................... 204
6.1.1.2 CPU Load .......................................................................................... 200
6.1.1.3 System Log Information................................................................... 201
6.1.1.4 System / Detailed Log....................................................................... 207
6.1.2 Monitor / Port State ............................................................................ 208
6.1.2.1 Port State .......................................................................................... 208
6.1.2.2 Traffic Overview ............................................................................... 209
6.1.2.3 QoS Statistics .................................................................................... 210
6.1.2.4 QCL Status ........................................................................................ 210
6.1.2.5 Detailed Port Statistics ..................................................................... 212
6.1. 3 Monitor / Security............................................................................... 215
6.1.3.1 Security / Access Management Statistics ......................................... 215
6.1.3.2 Security / Network ............................................................................ 216
6.1.3.3 Security / AAA .................................................................................. 238
6.1.3.4 Switch / SNMP / RMON ..................................................................... 245
6.1.4 LACP System Status ............................................................................. 252
6.1.4.1 System Status .................................................................................... 252
6.1.4.2 LACP Port Status ............................................................................... 253
6.1.4.3 LACP statistics ................................................................................... 254
6.1.5 Loop Protection ................................................................................... 254
6.1.6 STP Bridge Status ................................................................................ 255
6.1.6.1 Bridge Status .................................................................................... 255
6.1.6.2 STP Port Status ................................................................................. 257
6.1.6.3 STP Port Statistics ............................................................................. 258
6.1.7 MVR Status .......................................................................................... 260
6.1.7.1 Statistics ............................................................................................ 260
6.1.7.2 MVR Group Table ............................................................................. 261
6.1.8 Monitor / IPMC / IGMP Snooping ....................................................... 262
6.1.8.1 IGMP Snooping ................................................................................ 262
6.1.8.2 MLD Snooping Status....................................................................... 266
6.1.9 Monitor / LLDP .................................................................................... 271
6.1.9.1 LLDP / Neighbor ............................................................................... 271
6.1.9.2 LLDP MED Neighbours ..................................................................... 272
6.1.9.3 LLDP EEE ........................................................................................... 277
6
6.1.9.4 LLDP Statistics ................................................................................... 279
6.1.10 Dynamic MAC Table .......................................................................... 281
6.1.11 VLAN Membership Status ................................................................. 283
6.1.13 VCL MAC-Based VLAN Status ........................................................... 287
6.1.14 sFlow .................................................................................................. 289
6.2 Diagnostic ............................................................................................... 290
6.2.1 Ping ...................................................................................................... 290
6.2.2 Ping6 .................................................................................................... 290
6.2.3 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostic ................................................................... 291
6.3 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 293
6.3.1 Restart Device...................................................................................... 293
6.3.2 Factory Defaults .................................................................................. 293
6.3.3 Software Upload ................................................................................. 294
6.3.3.1 Firmware Update ............................................................................. 294
6.3.3.2 Image Select ..................................................................................... 295
6.3.4 Configuration ...................................................................................... 296
7. CE .............................................................................................................. 299
7
1. Products Overview
The switch is 24-port 10/100/1000Base-T + 2 10G SFP+ Open Slot Rack-mount L2+ Full
Management Network Switch / PoE Switch that is designed for medium or large network
environment to strengthen its network connection. The switch supports 128G non-blocking
switch fabric, the 24 gigabit ports and 4 10G ports can transmit and receive data traffic
without any lost. The EEE feature reduces the power consumption when there is no traffic
forwarding even port is still connected. The 10G uplink port design is available and
important for high bandwidth uplink request when cascaded with other switch. The switch
also supports Layer 2+ full management software features. These features are powerful to
provide network control, management, monitor and security feature requests. Including
rack-mount brackets, the 19" size fits into your rack environment. It is a superb choice to
boost your network with better performance and efficiency.
2 x 10 Gigabit SFP+ Open Slots
The switch equips with 2 10G SFP+ open slots as the uplink ports, the 10G uplink design
provides an excellent solution for expanding your network from 1G to 10G. By 10G
speed, this product provides high flexibility and high bandwidth connectivity to
another 10G switch or the Servers, Workstations and other attached devices which
support 10G interface. The user can also aggregate the 10G ports as Trunk group to
enlarge the bandwidth.
Stacking Features
The switch includes a stacking feature by using 2 SFP+ ports that allows multiple
switches to operate as a single unit. Any single switch in the stack can manage all the
other units in the stack and uses a single IP address which allows the user to manage
every port in the stack from this one address. These stacks can include up to 16 switches,
or total 384 gigabit ports plus 32 ports 10G in a switch.
Management Features
The switch includes full Layer 2+ Management features. The software set includes up to
4K 802.1Q VLAN groups and advanced Protocol VLAN, Private VLAN, MVR…features.
There are 8 physical queues Quality of Service, IPv4/v6 Multicast filtering, Rapid
Spanning Tree protocol to avoid network loop, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol to
integrate VLAN and Spanning Tree, LACP, LLDP; sFlow, port mirroring, cable diagnostic
and advanced Network Security features. It also provides Console CLI for out of band
management and SNMP, Web GUI for in band Management.
8
1.1 Major Management Features
24 10/100/1000Base RJ-45 plus 2 10G Base SFP Stackable
Up to 128Gbps switching capacity, 16K MAC Address Table
Per-Port Power Management Feature supports Enable/Disable, Priority Setting,
Overloading Protection and Power Level settings
IEEE 802.1D STP and IEEE 802.1w RSTP
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, up to 4K VLAN Group
Port Based VLAN, MAC Based VLAN, Protocol Based VLAN, MVR and QinQ
IEEE 802.3ad LACP, Static Trunk support up to 14 trunks, up to 8 ports per trunk
IGMP Snooping V1/V2/V3 and Querier port
Up to 9K Jumbo Frame
Rate Control and Strom Control for Broadcast/Multicast/Un-known Unicast
QoS supports up to 8 priority queues per port, 802.1p/IP Precedence, IP ToS, IP
DSCP, DiffServ, the queue scheduling supports WRR, Strict and Hybrid
Advanced Security supports IEEE 802.1x, RADIUS, TACAS+, IP/MAC Filter
Support Command Line, Web Management, Telnet, SNMP V1/V2c/V3, RMON,
Secured Management supports HTTPS, SSL and SSHv2
sFlow, NTP, LLDP, Port Mirroring, Cable Diagnostic, UPnP...
IPv6 Features
Event/Error Log
Dual F/W images
DHCP: Client, Relay/Option82, Snooping
Note: Please see the most updated datasheet for the detail product
specification. You can check the web site or contact the sales of the supplier.
9
1.2 Product Specification
Hardware Specification
Interface
Total Port
28
10/100/1000 Mbps
24
1G SFP/10G SFP
2
Stacking slot
2
Auto negotiation and Auto-MDIX
Yes
Backpressure for half duplex,
Flow Control
802.3x for full duplex
Console (RS-232)
LED
Yes
System (State / Color)
Y
Port (State: Link/Act / Color)
Y
CPU
416MHz
Flash
16MB
SDRAM
128MB
Packet Buffer
System
32MB
Switching Capacity
128Gbps non-blocking
Forwarding Architecture
Store and forward
Package Forwarding Rate
95.2Mpps
MAC Address Table
16K
Jumbo Frame
Power
9K
AC Input
100-240V AC, 50/60Hz
Requirement /
Consumption
Environment
Consumption - not include PSE
25W
Operating Temperature/ Degree C
0~40
Relative Humidity at operating
Storage Temperature / Degree C
Relative Humidity at storage
Mechanical
Dimension mm(H*W*D)
5~90% (non-condensing)
-20~80
5~90% (non-condensing)
44*440*331mm
Weight
3.0kg
Regular
Compliance
CE, FCC Part 15 Class A
Yes
10
Software Specification
IEEE 802.3 - 10Base-T
IEEE 802.3u - 100Base-TX
IEEE 802.3ab - 1000Base-T
IEEE 802.3z - 1000Base-SX/LX
IEEE 802.3x - Flow Control
IEEE 802.1Q - VLAN
Standard
IEEE 802.1p - Class of Service
IEEE 802.1D - Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1w - Rapid Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1s - Multiple Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.3ad - Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
IEEE802.1v - Protocol VLAN
IEEE 802.1AB - LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol)
IEEE 802.1X - Access Control
Port Configuration
Link State, Speed/Duplex, Auto-Nego, Flow Control
Rate Control/Limit
Port based and 802.1Q Tag based VLAN
Maximum 4K VLAN Group, 4096 VLANs ID
QinQ
Private VLAN
VLAN
MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)
MAC based VLAN
IP Subnet-based VLAN
IEEE802.1v Protocol VLAN
Voice VLAN
8 Physical priority queues
QoS
Scheduling – WRR, Strict, Hybrid
CoS: Port based, 802.1p, DSCP, TCP/UDP Port based
Storm Control (Broadcast, Multicast, un-known Unicast)
Up to 13 LA Group, up to 16 ports per group
Link Aggregation
Static and 802.3ad LACP
Static Trunk
Hash Algorithm Type (DA, SA, DA+SA MAC-based, SIP…)
11
Loop Protection
Protect the unexpected network loop by shutdown port
IEEE 802.1D – Legacy Spanning Tree (STP)
Spanning tree
IEEE 802.1w – Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP)
IEEE 802.1s – Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP)
BPDU Guard, BPDU Filtering
IGMP Snooping v1/v2/v3, MLD(Ipv6) Snooping v1/v2
Multicast
Maximum 8K Multicast Groups
IGMP/MLD Querier, Router Port, Proxy, Immediate Leave
Traffic Mirroring
MAC Address Table
Port Mirror (1 to 1, 1 to N, N to 1)
sFlow
Dynamic MAC address management
Static MAC address
Port Security (MAC-Port, IP-MAC-Port Binding)
802.1x authentication (Port based, MAC address based)
User Name Password Authentication by Local/Radius…
Stacking Unit: max 16
Up to 15 User Privilege Levels
Access Management by IP
Security
IP Source Guard
RADIUS
TACACS+
Guest VLAN
DoS Defence
SSHv1/SSHv2
SSLv2/SSLv3/TLSv1
Access Control List (L2/L3/L4)
Web GUI Management, CLI (Console/Telnet/SSH)
DHCP Client, Snooping, Relay/Option 82, BOOTP
SNMP V1/V2c/V3, Trap, RMON
Management
Firmware upgrade by TFTP/HTTP
Configuration Backup/Reload
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) by lPv4/v6 types
System Log for event, warning and information
NTP/SNTP
12
VeriPHY Diagnostic
Maintenance
IPv4/V6 Ping Diagnostics
CPU Monitor
PD Status monitoring
Note: We reserve the right to change the detail parameters listed in manual
without earlier inform. Please always see the most updated datasheet for the
detail product specification. You can check the web site or contact the sales of
the supplier.
1.3 Package Contents
Before you start to install this switch, please verify your package that contains the
following items:
-
One Network Switch
-
One Power Cord
-
One User Manual CD
-
One pair Rack-mount kit + 8 Screws
13
2. Hardware Description
This section mainly describes the hardware of Full L2 Management Network Switch and
gives a physical and functional overview on the certain switch.
Front Panel
The front panel of the L2+ management switch consists of 24 10/100/1000 Base-TX RJ-45
ports and 2 Gigabit uplink SFP ports as well as the LED Indicators.
LED Indicators
The LED Indicators present real-time information of systematic operation status. The
following table provides description of LED status and its meaning.
LED
Color / Status
Description
No. of LEDs
Power
Amber On
Power on
Power
10/100/1000M
Green On
Green Blinking
Link Up
Data Activating
linked to Power
Device
Data Activating
SFP
Green On
Green Blinking
24(1~24)
25~26
25~26
Rear Panel
The 3-pronged power plug is placed at the right side of rear panel of the switch which
shown as below.
14
Hardware Installation
The switch is usually mounted in the 19” rack, the rack is usually installed in IT room or
other secured places. The switch supports AC power input and rack mount mounting.
Make sure all the power cables, Ethernet cables, screws and the air circulation are well
prepared and installed as below description.
AC Power Input
Connect the attached power cord to the AC power input connector, the available AC
power input is range from 100-264VAC.
Ethernet cable Request
The wiring cable types are as below.
10 Base-T: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 3, 4, 5 cable, EIA/TIA-568 100-ohm (Max. 100m)
100 Base-TX: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 5 cable, EIA/TIA-568 100-ohm (Max. 100m)
1000 Base-T: 4-pair UTP/STP Cat. 5 cable, EIA/TIA-568 100-ohm (Max. 100m)
SFP Installation
While install the SFP transceiver, make sure the SFP type of the 2 ends is the same and
the transmission distance, wavelength, fiber cable can meet your request. It is
suggested to purchase the SFP transceiver with the switch provider to avoid any
incompatible issues.
The way to connect the SFP transceiver is to plug in SFP fiber transceiver slot fist. The
SFP transceiver has 2 plug for fiber cable, one is TX (transmit), the other is RX (receive).
Cross-connect the transmit channel at each end to the receive channel at the opposite
end.
Rack mount Installation
Attach the brackets to the device by using the screws provided in the Rack Mount kit.
Mount the device in the 19‟ rack by using four rack-mounting screws provided by the
rack manufacturer.
15
3. Preparation for Management
The switch provides both in-band and out-band configuration methods.
Out-band Management: You can configure the switch via RS232 console cable if you
don’t attach your admin PC to your network, or if you lose network connection to your
switch. It wouldn’t be affected by network performance. This is so-called out-band
management.
In-Band Management: You can remotely manage the switch via the Web browser,
such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, or Mozilla, to configure and interrogate the switch
from anywhere on the network.
Following topics are covered in this chapter:
3.1 Preparation for Serial Console
3.2 Preparation for Web Interface
3.1 Preparation for Serial Console
In the package, there is one RS-232 console cable. Please attach one end of the console
cable to your PC COM port, while the other end to the console port of the switch.
1. Go to Start -> Program -> Accessories -> Communication -> Hyper Terminal
2. Give a name to the new console connection.
3. Choose the COM name
4. Select correct serial settings. The serial settings of the switch are as below:
Baud Rate: 115200 / Parity: None / Data Bit: 8 / Stop Bit: 1
5. After connected, you can see Switch login request.
6. Login the switch. The default username is “admin”, password “admin”.
Figure 3-1 Hyper Terminal Console Screen
Note: The Win 7 or later OS version doesn't provide Console Terminal tool, please
download the tool, Hyper Terminal from Microsoft web site or other terminal tools,
16
such as PuTTY for console connection. Type Hyper Terminal or Putty in Google web site
to find the link to download.
Figure 3-2 Putty Configuration
Figure 3-3 Putty Login Screen
3.2 Preparation for Web Interface
The web management page allows you to use a standard web-browser such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer, Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox, to configure and
interrogate the switch from anywhere on the network.
Before you attempt to use the web user interface to manage switch operation, verify
that your switch is properly installed on your network and that every PC on this
network can access the switch via the web browser.
17
1. Verify th
hat your nettwork interfface card (NIC) is well-fu
unctioned, aand your operating
system supports
s
TCP/IP protoco
ol.
2. Power on
o the switch and use th
he RJ-45 cab
ble to connect to your co
omputer.
3. The swittch default IP address iss 192.168.2.1
1. The switch
h and the co
onnected PC
C should
locate within
w
the sa
ame IP subne
et.
4. Change your compu
uter's IP add
dress to 192..168.2.XX (any number besides 1) or
o other
IP addre
ess which is located in th
he 192.168.2
2.x (For exam
mple: IP Add
dress: 192.16
68.2.30;
Subnet Mask: 255.2
255.255.0) su
ubnet.
LLaunch the web
w browse
er and Login .
5
5. Launch the
t web bro
owser (Intern
net Explorerr or Mozilla Firefox) on tthe PC.
6
6. Type htttp://192.168
8.2.1 (or the
e IP address of the switcch). And theen press Ente
er.
7
7. The login screen will appear nexxt.
8
8. Key in th
he password
d. Default usser name and password are both ad
dmin.
l
the sw
witch, the fo llowing step
ps can help you
y to identtify the prob
blem.
If you can't login
1
1. Switch to DOS comma
and mode a nd type the "ipconfig"
" to check th
he NIC's settting.
T
Type the "ping 192.168
8.2.1" to ve
erify a normal response time.
2
2. Check the
e security & firewall
f
sett ings of yourr computer.
3
3. Try differe
ent Web-bro
owser, like tthe Mozilla or
o Google Chrome.
18
3.3 Preparation for Telnet/SSH Interface
If your Window OS is Win XP, Win 2000 or any early versions, you can access the Telnet
console by default command. If your OS is Window 7 or later version, please download
the terminal tool, such as HyperTerminal or Putty.
The switch support both Telnet and SSH console. The SSH console can be treated as
secured Telnet connection, need to enable the SSH feature in "Security / Switch / SSH".
Traditional way for Telnet Connection
1. Go to Start -> Run -> cmd. And then press Enter
2. Type the Telnet 192.168.2.1 (or the IP address of the switch). And then press Enter.
Access Telnet or SSH by Terminal tool, Putty.
1. Open Telnet/SSH Client/PuTTY
In the Session configuration, choose the Telnet/SSH in Protocol field.
In the Session configuration, enter the Host Name (IP Address of your switch) and Port
number (default Telnet =23, SSH = 22).
Then click on “Open” to start the SSH session console.
2. After click on Open, then you can see the cipher information in the popup screen. Press
Yes to accept the Security Alert.
If you choose Telnet connection, there is no such cipher information and window. It goes
to next step directly.
19
3
3. After few seconds, the Telnet/SSH
H connection is establish
hed, the log
gin page of
T
Telnet/SSH iss the same as
a console. T
The comman
nd line of Telnet, SSH an
nd console are all
tthe same.
20
4. Feature Configuration - Web UI
The switch provides abundant software features. After login to the switch, you can
start configuring the settings or monitoring the status. This is one question mark on
the right top of the screen, you can also click the question mark to get help from the
system.
Following are the Web UI configuration guide for your reference.
4.1 System Configuration
4.1.1 System Information
This page shows the system information and allows you to configure the new settings.
System Contact
The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node, together with
information on how to contact this person. The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the
allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.
System Name
It’s the administratively assigned name for this managed node. By convention, this is the
node's fully-qualified domain name. A domain name is a text string drawn from the
alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), minus sign (-). No space characters are permitted as part of
a name. The first character must be an alpha character. And the first or last character
must not be a minus sign. The allowed string length is 0 to 255.
System Location
The physical location of this node(e.g., telephone closet, 3rd floor). The allowed string
length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.
Time zone Offset
Provide the time zone offset relative to UTC/GMT.
The offset is given in minutes east of GMT. The valid range is from -720 to 720 minutes.
21
Buttons:
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.1.2 IP Configuration:
Configure the switch-managed IP information on this page.
The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration.
The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration.
DHCP Client
Enable the DHCP client by checking this box. If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is
zero, DHCP will retry. If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non-zero, DHCP will
stop and the configured IP settings will be used. The DHCP client will announce the
configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup.
IP Address
Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation.
IP Mask
Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation.
IP Router
Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation.
NTP
Provide the IP address of the NTP Server in dotted decimal notation.
DNS Server
Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation.
VLAN ID
Provide the managed VLAND ID. The allowed range is 1 to 4095.
22
DNS Proxy
When DNS proxy is enabled, the switch will relay DNS requests to the current configured
DNS server on the switch, and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
Renew: Click to renew DHCP. This button is only available if DHCP is enabled.
4.1.3 IPv6 Configuration
Configure the switch-managed IPv6 information on this page:
The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration.
The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration.
Auto Configuration
Enable IPv6 auto-configuration by checking this box. If fails, the configured IPv6 address
is zero. The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds, the
total time needed to complete auto-configuration can be significantly longer.
Address
Provide the IPv6 address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as
eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For
example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used as
a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can
only appear once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example,
'::192.1.2.34'.
Prefix
Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch. The allowed range is 1 to 128.
Router
Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records
23
represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each
field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'.
The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing
multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It can also
represent a legally valid IPv4 address. . For example, '::192.1.2.34'.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
Renew: Click to renew IPv6 AUTOCONF. This button is only available if IPv6 AUTOCONF is
enabled.
4.1.4 NTP Configuration:
NTP is short of Network Time Protocol. Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to
synchronize time clocks on the internet. You can configure NTP Servers' IP address here
to synchronize the clocks of the remote time server on the network.
This page indicates the NTP mode operation:
Mode
The possible modes are:
Enable NTP mode operation. When NTP mode operation is enabled, the agent forwards
NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet
domain.
Disable NTP mode operation.
Server #
Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records
represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each
field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can
be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros;
but it can only appear once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example,
'::192.1.2.34'.
24
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.1.5 System Log Configuration:
System Log is useful to provide system administrator monitors the switch events history.
The switch supports syslog server mode. User can install the syslog server in one computer,
then configure the server address and event types in the switch's system log configuration.
When the events occur, the switch will send information or warning message to the
syslog server. The administrator can analysis the system logs recorded in the syslog server
to find out the cause of the issues.
The switch Web UI allows you to enable the Syslog Server, assign the IP address and assign
the syslog level.
Server Mode
Indicates the server mode operation. When the mode operation is enabled, the syslog
message will send out to syslog server. The syslog protocol is based on UDP
communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send
acknowledgments back to the sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does
not provide acknowledgments. The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog
server does not exist. Possible modes are:
Enable server mode operation.
Disable server mode operation.
Server Address
Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server. If the switch provides DNS feature, it also
can be a host name.
Syslog Level
Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server.
Possible modes are:
Info: Send information, warnings and errors.
Warning: Send warnings and errors.
Error: Send errors.
25
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.2 Power Reduction
4.2.1 LED Power Reduction Configuration
LEDs Intensity
The LEDs power consumption can be reduced by lowering the LEDs intensity. LEDs
intensity for example could be lowered during night time, or they could be turn
completely off. It is possible to configure 24 different hours of the day, at where the LEDs
intensity should be set.
Time
The time at which the LEDs intensity shall be set. The time setting is step by one hour.
Intensity
The LEDs intensity (100% = Full power, 0% = LED off)
Maintenance Time
When a network administrator does
maintenance of the switch (e.g. adding or
moving users) he might want to have full LED
intensity during the maintenance period .
Therefore it is possible to specify that the LEDs
shall use full intensity a specific period of time.
Maintenance Time is the number of seconds
that the LEDs will have full intensity after either
a port has changed link state, or the LED push button has been pushed.
26
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.2.2 EEE Configuration:
This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current EEE port settings:
EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is very low traffic
utilization (or no traffic).
EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic. When a port gets data to
be transmitted. all circuits are powered up. The time it takes to power up the circuits is
named wakeup time. The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other
link speeds. EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make
sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when
traffic is transmitted. The devices can exchange information about the devices wakeup
time using the LLDP protocol.
For maximizing the power saving, the circuit won’t be powered up once transmit data are
ready for a port, but is instead queued until 3000 bytes of data are ready to be
transmitted. For not introducing a large delay in case that data less than 3000 bytes shall
be transmitted, data are always transmitted after 48 us, giving a maximum latency of 48
us + the wakeup time.
If desired it is possible to minimize the latency for specific frames, by mapping the frames
to a specific queue (done with QOS), and then mark the queue as an urgent queue. When
an urgent queue gets data to be transmitted, the circuits will be powered up at once and
the latency will be reduced to the wakeup time.
Port
The switch port number of the logical EEE port.
EEE Enabled
Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port.
27
EEE Urgent Queues
Queues set will activate transmission of frames as soon as any data is available. Otherwise
the queue will postpone the transmission until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.3 Port Configuration:
This page displays current port configurations and link status. Some of the Ports' settings
can also be configured here.
Port
This is the port number for this switch.
Link
The current link state is displayed graphically.
Green indicates the link is up and red means down.
Current Link Speed
Provides the current link speed of the port.
Ex: 1Gfdx: 1G indicates the Gigabit Speed, fdx indicates the Full Duplex Mode.
28
Configured Link Speed
Select any available link speed for the given switch port.
Auto Speed: selects the highest speed that is compatible with a link partner.
Disabled: disables the switch port operation.
Fiber Speed
Configure speed for fiber port.
Note: Port speed for the Copper ports will automatically be set to Auto when dual media
is selected.
Disable SFPs (Copper port only).
SFP-Auto automatically determines the speed at the SFP.
Note: There is no standardized way to do SFP auto detect, so here it is done by reading
the SFP ROM. Due to the missing standardized way of doing SFP auto detect some SFPs
might not be detectable.
1000-X force SFP speed to 1000-X.
100-FX force SFP speed to 100-FX.
Flow Control
When Auto Speed is selected on a port, this section indicates the flow control capability
that is advertised to the link partner.
When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. The Current Rx column
indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed, and the Current Tx column
indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx and Tx settings are
determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation.
Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the setting for
Configured Link Speed.
Maximum Frame Size
Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS.
The switch supports up to 109K Jumbo Frame.
Excessive Collision Mode
Configure port transmit collision behavior.
Discard: Discard frame after 16 collisions (default).
Restart: Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions.
Power Control
The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port. The
Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port.
Disabled: All power savings mechanisms disabled.
ActiPHY: Link down power savings enabled.
Perfect Reach: Link up power savings enabled.
Enabled: Both link up and link down power savings enabled.
29
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
Refresh: Click to refresh the page. Any changes made locally will be undone.
4.4 Security Configuration:
The Security Configuration feature includes 3 sub-titles, Switch, Network and AAA.
4.4.1 Security / Switch
The switch settings includes User Database, Privilege Levels, Authentication Method, SSH,
HTTPs, Access Management, SNMP and RMON setting. Following are the topic and
configuration guide.
4.4.1.1 Security / Switch / Users Configuration
This page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way to login as
another user on the web server is to close the browser and reopen it.
This page configures a user: This is also a link to Add User & Edit User
Add New User/Edit User
Click "Add New User", the configuration page goes to "Add User" screen. You can see
the User Setting table, follow the below instruction to fill the table.
Click the created User Name, the page goes to "Edit User" screen, you can change the
settings on it.
30
User Name
A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32. The valid user name is a combination of letters, numbers and
underscores.
Password
The password of the user. The allowed string length is 0 to 32.
Privilege Level
The privilege level of the user. The allowed range is 1 to 15.
If the privilege level value is 15, it can access all groups, i.e. that is granted the fully
control of the device. But others value need to refer to each group privilege level. User's
privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of
that group.
By default setting, most groups privilege level 5 has the read-only access and privilege
level 10 has the read-write access. And the system maintenance (software upload, factory
defaults and etc.) need user privilege level 15. Generally, the privilege level 15 can be
used for an administrator account, privilege level 10 for a standard user account and
privilege level 5 for a guest account.
Check the next chapter to see how to configure privilege level.
Buttons
Add new user: Click to add a new user.
4.4.1.2 Security / Switch / Privilege Levels Configuration:
This page provides an overview of the privilege levels.
31
Group Name
The name identifying the privilege group. In most cases, a privilege level group consists of
a single module (e.g. LACP, RSTP or QoS), but a few of them contains more than one.
The following description defines these privilege level groups in details:
System: Contact, Name, Location, Time zone, Log.
Security: Authentication, System Access Management, Port (contains Dot1x port, MAC
based and the MAC Address Limit), ACL, HTTPS, SSH, ARP Inspection and IP source guard.
IP: Everything except 'ping'.
Port: Everything except 'VeriPHY'.
Diagnostics: 'ping' and 'VeriPHY'.
Maintenance: CLI- System Reboot, System Restore Default, System Password,
Configuration Save, Configuration Load and Firmware Load. Web- Users, Privilege Levels
and everything in Maintenance.
Debug: Only present in CLI.
Privilege Levels
Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups:
configuration read-only, configuration/execute read-write, status/statistics read-only,
status/statistics read-write (e.g. for clearing of statistics).
User Privilege should be same or greater than the authorization Privilege level to have
the access to that group.
Insufficient Privilege Level: If you login with lower level privilege and try to access the
high privilege level configuration feature, the following message, “Insufficient Privilege
Level” will appear. If you want continue, be sure that you have the valid privilege level.
32
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.4.1.3 Security / Switch / Auth Method
This page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the
switch via one of the management client interfaces.
The table has one row for each client type and a number of columns, which are:
Client
The management client for which the configuration below applies.
Authentication Method
Authentication Method can be set to one of the
following values:
none: authentication is disabled and login is not
possible.
local: use the local user database on the switch for
authentication.
RADIUS: use a remote RADIUS server for
authentication.
TACACS+ : use a remote TACACS server for authentication.
Fallback
Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box.
If none of the configured authentication servers are alive, the local user database is used
for authentication.
This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to a value other than 'none' or
'local'.
33
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.4.1.4 Security /Switch / SSH Configuration
With SSH, you can remotely connect to the switch by command line interface. The SSH
connection can secure all the configuration commands you sent to the switch. It is also
known as secured Telnet console.
To access the switch by SSH, you should install SSH client on your computer, such as PuTTy
console tool. In the switch side, the switch acts as SSH server for user login, and you can
Enable or Disable SSH on this page.
Please check the chapter 3.3 Preparation for Telnet/SSH connection to see how to manage
the switch through SSH console.
Mode
Indicates the SSH mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enable: Enable SSH mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SSH mode operation.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.4.1.5 Security / Switch / HTTPS Configuration
The web management page also provides secured management HTTPS login. All the
configuration commands will be secured and will be hard for the hackers to sniff the
login password and configuration commands.
This page allows you to configure HTTPS mode.
34
Mode
Indicates the HTTPS mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enable: Enable HTTPS mode operation.
Disabled: Disable HTTPS mode operation.
Automatic Redirect
Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation. Automatically redirect web browser to
HTTPS when HTTPS mode is enabled. Possible modes are:
Enable: Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation.
Disabled: Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.4.1.6 Security / Switch / Access Management Configuration
The Access Management mode allows user to limit the switch access with specific range of
IP address and disable some remote management service, such HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, Telnet
and SSH. This feature is important while user installed the switch on network. After
enabled the Access Management, only the pre-configured IP address or a range of IP
address can access the switch management interface, and only the available service can
be accessed.
Configure access management table on this page. The maximum entry number is 16. If
the application's type match any one of the access management entries, it will allow
access to the switch.
Example of the below figure, only the IP Addresses range from 192.168.2.101 to
192.168.2.200 can access the switch's management interface. The available services are
HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, Telnet and SSH. For example, if there is one IP address, 192.168.2.201
try to open the web management interface, it is not allowed.
35
Mode
Indicates the access management mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enable: Enable access management mode operation.
Disabled: Disable access management mode operation.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Start IP address
Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry.
End IP address
Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry.
With the Start and End IP address, you can assign a range of IP addresses.
HTTP/HTTPS
Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP/HTTPS interface if the host IP
address matches the IP address range provided in the entry.
SNMP
Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP interface if the host IP address
matches the IP address range provided in the entry.
TELNET / SSH
Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET/SSH interface if the host IP
address matches the IP address range provided in the entry.
Buttons
Add New Entry: Click to add a new group entry
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.4.1.7 Security / Switch / SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol used for exchanging
management information between network devices. The switch supports SNMP and
equips lots of OIDs for remote management. All the OIDs are unique and corresponding
to one feature/command.
The switch can support SNMP V1, V2c and V3. The following commands show how to
configure SNMP and its related parameters.
36
Mode
Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enable: Enable SNMP mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.
Version
Indicates the SNMP supported version. Possible versions are:
SNMPv1: Set SNMP supported version 1.
SNMPv2c: Set SNMP supported version 2c.
SNMPv3: Set SNMP supported version 3.
Read Community
Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent. The allowed
string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If SNMP version is
SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table. It
provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c
community string. In addition to community string, a particular range of source addresses
can be used to restrict source subnet.
Write Community
Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent. The allowed
string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If SNMP version is
SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table. It
provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c
community string. In addition to community string, a particular range of source addresses
can be used to restrict source subnet.
Engine ID
Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID. The string must contain an even number(in hexadecimal
format) with number of digits between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not
allowed. Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users.
SNMP Trap Configuration
Configure SNMP trap on this page.
37
Trap Mode
Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enable: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.
Trap Version
Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:
SNMPv1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.
SNMPv2c:Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.
SNMPv3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.
Trap Community
Indicates the community access string when sending SNMP trap packet. The allowed
string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Trap Destination Address
Indicates the SNMP trap destination address.
Trap Destination IPv6 Address
Provide the trap destination IPv6 address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records
represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each
field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can
be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros;
but it can only appear once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example,
'::192.1.2.34'.
Trap Authentication Failure
Indicates that the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps.
Possible modes are:
Enable: SNMP trap authentication failure.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap authentication failure.
Trap Link-up and Link-down
Indicates the SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enable: Enable SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation.
38
Trap Inform Mode
Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enable: Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation.
Trap Inform Timeout (seconds)
Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 0 to 2147.
Trap Inform Retry Times
Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 0 to 255.
Trap Probe Security Engine ID
Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation. Possible values are:
Enable: Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.
Trap Security Engine ID
Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID. SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM
for authentication and privacy. A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed.
When "Trap Probe Security Engine ID" is enabled, the ID will be probed automatically.
Otherwise, the ID specified in this field is used. The string must contain an even number(in
hexadecimal format) with number of digits between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's
are not allowed.
Trap Security Name
Indicates the SNMP trap security name. SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for
authentication and privacy. A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are
enabled.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
SNMPv3 Community Configuration
In SNMP V3, it is start to support User Name and its privilege. You can configure SNMPv3
community table on this page:
The entry index key is Community.
39
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Community
Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent. The allowed
string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126. The
community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c
community string.
Source IP
Indicates the SNMP access source address. A particular range of source addresses can be
used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask.
Source Mask
Indicates the SNMP access source address mask.
Buttons
Add new community: Click to add a new community entry
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
SNMPv3 User Configuration
Configure SNMPv3 user table on this page. The entry index keys are Engine ID and User
Name.
40
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Engine ID
An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The string must
contain an even number(in hexadecimal format) with number of digits between 10 and
64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed. The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User-based
Security Model (USM) for message security and the View-based Access Control Model
(VACM) for access control. For the USM entry, the USM User Engine ID and USM User
Name are the entry's keys. In a simple agent, USM User Engine ID is always that agent's
own SNMP Engine ID value. The value can also take the value of the SNMP Engine ID of a
remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate. In other words, if user
engine ID equal system engine ID then it is local user; otherwise it's remote user.
User Name
A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Security Level
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:
NoAuth, NoPriv: No authentication and no privacy.
Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and no privacy.
Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.
The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means it must
first be ensured that the value is set correctly.
Authentication Protocol
Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible
authentication protocols are:
None: No authentication protocol.
MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol.
SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol.
The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means must
first ensure that the value is set correctly.
Authentication Password
A string identifying the authentication password phrase. For MD5 authentication
protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 32. For SHA authentication protocol, the
allowed string length is 8 to 40. The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
41
Privacy Protocol
Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy protocols
are:
None: No privacy protocol.
DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol.
Privacy Password
A string identifying the privacy password phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 32, and
the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons
Add new user: Click to add a new user entry
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
SNMPv3 Group Configuration
Configure SNMPv3 group table on this page:
The entry index keys are Security Mode and Security Name.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Security Model
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:
v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
USM: User-based Security Model (USM).
Security Name
A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
42
Group Name
A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons
Add new group: Click to add a new group entry
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
SNMPv3 View Configuration
Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page.
The entry index keys are View Name and OID Sub-tree.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
View Name
A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
43
View Type
Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view types are:
Included: An optional flag to indicate that this view sub-tree should be included.
excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view sub-tree should be excluded.
In general, if a view entry's view type is 'excluded', there should be another view entry
existing with view type as 'included' and it's OID sub-tree should overstep the 'excluded'
view entry.
OID Subtree
The OID defining the root of the sub-tree to add to the named view. The allowed OID
length is 1 to 128. The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk (*).
Buttons
Add new view: Click to add a new view entry
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
SNMPv3 Access Configuration
Configure SNMPv3 access table on this page. The entry index keys are Group Name,
Security Model, and Security Level.
44
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Group Name
A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Security Model
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:
Any: Any security model accepted (v1|v2c|USM).
V1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
V2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
USM: User-based Security Model (USM).
Security Level: Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to.
Possible security models are:
NoAuth, NoPriv: No authentication and no privacy.
Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and no privacy.
Auth,Priv: Authentication and privacy.
Read View Name
The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request
the current values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII
characters from 33 to 126.
Write View Name
The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially
set new values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII
characters from 33 to 126.
45
Buttons
Add new access: Click to add a new access entry
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
4.4.1.8 RMON Statistics Configuration
RMON is the abbreviation of Remote Monitoring On Network. An RMON implementation
typically operates in a client/server model. Monitoring device (Probe) contains RMON
software agents that collect information of the system and ports. The RMON software
agent acts as server, and the network management system (NMS) that communicate with
it acts as client. The RMON agent of the switch supports 4 groups, such as the Statistics,
History, Alarm and Event.
RMON Group
Function
Elements
Statistics
Contains statistics measured
by the probe for each
monitored interface on this
device.
Packets dropped, packets sent, bytes
sent (octets), broadcast packets,
multicast packets, CRC errors, undersize
packets, oversize packets, fragments,
jabbers, collisions, and counters for
packets ranging from 64, 65 to 127, 128
to 255, 256 to 511, 512 to 1023, and
1024 to 1518 bytes.
Real-time LAN statistics e.g.
utilization, collisions, CRC
errors
History
Records periodic statistical
samples from a network and
stores for retrieval.
History of above Statistics.
Alarm
Definitions for RMON SNMP
traps to be sent when
statistics exceed defined
thresholds
Interval for sampling, particular
variable, sample type, value of statistics
during the last sampling period, startup
alarm, rising threshold, rising index,
falling threshold, falling index.
Events
Controls the generation and
notification of events from
this device.
Event index, log index, event log time,
event description
46
The NMS can get the above information through remotely polling. The information from
the switch can be collected, analyzed and displayed as table or graphic...etc.
RMON Statistics Configuration
Configure RMON Statistics table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source
Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored. If in stacking switch, the value must
add 1000*(switch ID-1), for example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is 2005
Buttons
Add new entry: Click to add a new community entry
Save: Click to save changes
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
RMON History Configuration
Configure RMON History table on this page. The entry index key is ID
47
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source
Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored. If in stacking switch, the value must
add 1000*(switch ID-1), for example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is 2005.
Interval
Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data. The range is from
1 to 3600, default value is 1800 seconds.
Buckets
Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON.
The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 50.
Buckets Granted
The number of data shall be saved in the RMON.
48
Buttons
Add new entry: Click to add a new community entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
RMON Alarm Configuration
Configure RMON Alarm table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Interval
Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling
threshold. The range is from 1 to 2^31-1.
Variable
Indicates the particular variable to be sampled, the possible variables are:
InOctets: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters.
InUcastPkts: The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
InNUcastPkts: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets delivered to a
higher-layer protocol.
InDiscards: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are
normal.
InErrors: The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from
being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
InUnknownProtos: The number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of
the unknown or un-support protocol.
OutOctets: The number of octets transmitted out of the interface , including framing
49
characters.
OutUcastPkts: The number of uni-cast packets that request to transmit.
OutNUcastPkts: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets that request to
transmit.
OutDiscards: The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packets is
normal.
OutErrors: The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of
errors.
OutQlen: The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
Sample Type
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared
against the thresholds, possible sample types are:
Absolute: Get the sample directly.
Delta: Calculate the difference between samples (default).
Value
The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
Startup Alarm
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared
against the thresholds, possible sample types are:
Rising: Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold.
Falling: Trigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold.
RisingOrFalling: Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or
less than the falling threshold (default).
Rising Threshold
Rising threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647).
Rising Index
Rising event index (1-65535).
Falling Threshold
Falling threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647)
50
Falling Index
Falling event index (1-65535).
Buttons
Add new entry: Click to add a new community entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
RMON Event Configuration
Configure RMON Event table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Desc
Indicates this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string.
Type
Indicates the notification of the event, the possible types are:
None: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
Log: The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
SNMPtrap: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
Logandtrap: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are
normal.
51
community
Specify the community when trap is sent, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is
"public".
Event Last Time
Indicates the value of sysUp Time at the time this event entry last generated an event.
Buttons
Add new entry: Click to add a new community entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.4.2 Security /Network
4.4.2.1 Port Security Limit Control Configuration
This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings.
Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port. A user is identified
by a MAC address and VLAN ID. If Limit Control is enabled on a port, the limit specifies
the maximum number of users on the port. If this number is exceeded, an action is taken.
The action can be one of the four different actions as described below.
The Limit Control module utilizes a lower-layer module, Port Security module, which
52
manages MAC addresses learnt on the port.
The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide.
System Configuration
Mode
Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled,
other modules may still use the underlying functionality, but limit checks and
corresponding actions are disabled.
Aging Enabled
If checked, secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period.
Aging Period
If Aging Period is checked, then the aging period is controlled with this input. If other
modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses, they may
have other requirements to the aging period. The underlying port security will use the
shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality.
The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10,000,000 seconds.
To understand why aging may be desired, consider the following scenario: Suppose an
end-host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub, which in turn is connected to a port on
this switch on which Limit Control is enabled. The end-host will be allowed to forward if
the limit is not exceeded. Now suppose that the end-host logs off or powers down. If it
wasn't for aging, the end-host would still take up resources on this switch and will be
allowed to forward. To overcome this situation, enable aging. With aging enabled, a
timer is started once the end-host gets secured. When the timer expires, the switch starts
53
looking for frames from the end-host, and if such frames are not seen within the next
Aging Period, the end-host is assumed to be disconnected, and the corresponding
resources are freed on the switch.
Port Configuration
The table allows you to configure the Port Configuration parameters, which are:
Port
The port number to which the configuration below applies.
Mode
Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port. Both this and the Global Mode
must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect. Notice that other modules may
still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given
port.
Limit
The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port. This number
cannot exceed 1024. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding action is taken.
The switch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw
whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security-enabled port. Since all ports draw
from the same pool, it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted, if the
remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses.
Action
If Limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions:
None: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take no further
action.
54
Trap: If Limit+ 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, send an SNMP trap. If Aging is
disabled, only one SNMP trap will be sent, but with Aging enabled, new SNMP traps will
be sent every time the limit gets exceeded.
Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, shut down the port. This
implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port, and no new
address will be learned. Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the
port (by disconnecting the cable), the port will remain shut down. There are three ways to
re-open the port:
1) Boot the switch,
2) Disable and re-enable Limit Control on the port or the switch,
3) Click the Reopen button.
Trap & Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, both the "Trap" and
the "Shutdown" actions described above will be taken.
State
This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control's point of
view. The state takes one of four values:
Disabled: Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port.
Ready: The limit is not yet reached. This can be shown for all actions.
Limit Reached: Indicates that the limit is reached on this port. This state can only be
shown if Action is set to None or Trap.
Shutdown: Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module. This state
can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap & Shutdown.
Re-open Button
If a port is shutdown by this module, you may reopen it by clicking this button, which will
only be enabled if this is the case. For other methods, refer to Shutdown in the Action
section.
Note that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed, so non-committed
changes will be lost.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page. Note that non-committed changes will be lost.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.4.2.2 Security / Network / Network Access Server Configuration
This page allows you to configure the IEEE802.1X and MAC-based authentication system
and port settings.
55
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents
unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for
authentication. One or more central servers, the backend servers, determine whether the
user is allowed access to the network. These backend (RADIUS) servers are configured on
the "Configuration→Security→AAA" page. The IEEE802.1X standard defines port-based
operation, but non-standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored
below.
MAC-based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same
port, and doesn't require the user to have special 802.1X supplicant software installed on
his system. The switch uses the user's MAC address to authenticate against the backend
server. Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses, which makes MAC-based
authentication less secure than 802.1X authentication.
The NAS configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide.
System Configuration
Mode
Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled, all ports
are allowed forwarding of frames.
Enabled
If checked, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are re-authenticated after the
interval specified by the Re-authentication Period. Re-authentication for 802.1X-enabled
ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant
56
is no longer attached.
For MAC-based ports, re-authentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration
has changed. It does not involve communication between the switch and the client, and
therefore doesn't imply that a client is still present on a port (see Aging Period below).
Re-authentication Period
Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be
re-authenticated. This is only active if the Re-authentication Enabled checkbox is checked.
Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds.
EAPOL Timeout
Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames.
Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds. This has no effect for MAC-based ports.
Aging Period
This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security
functionality to secure MAC addresses:
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-Based Auth.
When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses, the Port
Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular
intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time. This
parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and
1000000 seconds.
If re-authentication is enabled and the port is in an 802.1X-based mode, this is not so
critical, since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon
the next re-authentication, which will fail. But if re-authentication is not enabled, the
only way to free resources is by aging the entries.
For ports in MAC-based Auth. mode, re-authentication doesn't cause direct
communication between the switch and the client, so this will not detect whether the
client is still attached or not, and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry.
Hold Time
This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security
functionality to secure MAC addresses:
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-Based Auth.
If a client is denied access - either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or
because the RADIUS server request times out (according to the timeout specified on the
"Configuration→Security→AAA" page) - the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized
state. The hold timer does not count during an on-going authentication.
In MAC-based Auth. mode, the switch will ignore new frames coming from the client
during the hold time.
The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.
RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled
RADIUS-assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which
traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch. The
RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take
advantage of this feature (see RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed
description).
The "RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally
57
enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class functionality. When checked, the
individual ports' ditto setting determine whether RADIUS-assigned QoS Class is enabled
on that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports.
RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled
RADIUS-assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a
successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch. Incoming traffic will be
classified to and switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN. The RADIUS server must be
configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature (see
RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description).
The "RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally
enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual
ports' ditto setting determine whether RADIUS-assigned VLAN is enabled on that port.
When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports.
Guest VLAN Enabled
A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN - typically with limited network access - on which
802.1X-unaware clients are placed after a network administrator-defined timeout. The
switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below.
The "Guest VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable
Guest VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines
whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN. When unchecked, the ability to move to
the Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports.
Guest VLAN ID
Port VLAN ID is the value for a single port, if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN. It is
only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Valid values are in the range [1; 4095].
Max. Reauth. Count
The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without
response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting. The
value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Valid values are in the range [1; 255].
Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen
The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life-time
of the port. Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN, it will first check
if this option is enabled or disabled. If disabled (unchecked; default), the switch will only
enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the
life-time of the port. If enabled (checked), the switch will consider entering the Guest
VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life-time of the port.
The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Port Configuration
The table has number of columns which allows you to configure the port mode based on
IEEE 802.1X standard. Select the port and configure the settings.
58
Port
The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Admin State
If NAS is globally enabled, this selection controls the port's authentication mode. The
following modes are available:
Force Authorized
In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up,
and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication.
Force Unauthorized
In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up,
and any client on the port will be disallowed network access.
Port-based 802.1X
In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and
the RADIUS server is the authentication server. The authenticator acts as the
man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the
authentication server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special
802.1X frames, known as EAPOL (EAP Over LANs) frames.
EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the
RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together
with other attributes like the switch's IP address, name, and the supplicant's port number
on the switch. EAP is very flexible, in that it allows for different authentication methods,
like MD5-CHALLENGE, PEAP, and TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator (the
switch) doesn't need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the
authentication server are using, or how many information exchange frames are needed
59
for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into
the relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a
success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch
uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant.
Note: Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is
configured to X seconds (using the AAA configuration page), and suppose that the first
server in the list is currently down (but not considered dead). Now, if the supplicant
retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds, then it will never get
authenticated, because the switch will cancel on-going backend authentication server
requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant. And since the
server hasn't yet failed (because the X seconds haven't expired), the same server will be
contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch. This
scenario will loop forever. Therefore, the server timeout should be smaller than the
supplicant's EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate.
Single 802.1X
In port-based 802.1X authentication, once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a
port, the whole port is opened for network traffic. This allows other clients connected to
the port (for instance through a hub) to piggy-back on the successfully authenticated
client and get network access even though they really aren't authenticated. To overcome
this security breach, use the Single 802.1X variant.
Single 802.1X is really not an IEEE standard, but features many of the same characteristics
as does port-based 802.1X. In Single 802.1X, at most one supplicant can get authenticated
on the port at a time. Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the
supplicant and the switch. If more than one supplicant is connected to a port, the one
that comes first when the port's link comes up will be the first one considered. If that
supplicant doesn't provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time, another
supplicant will get a chance. Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated, only that
supplicant will be allowed access. This is the most secure of all the supported modes. In
this mode, the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant's MAC address once
successfully authenticated.
Multi 802.1X
Multi 802.1X is - like Single 802.1X - not an IEEE standard, but a variant that features
many of the same characteristics. In Multi 802.1X, one or more supplicants can get
authenticated on the same port at the same time. Each supplicant is authenticated
individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module.
In Multi 802.1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination
MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant, since that
would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch.
Instead, the switch uses the supplicant's MAC address, which is obtained from the first
EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant. An exception to
this is when no supplicants are attached. In this case, the switch sends EAPOL Request
Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination - to wake up any
supplicants that might be on the port.
The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using
the Port Security Limit Control functionality.
MAC-based Auth.
Unlike port-based 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but merely a
best-practices method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based authentication, users are
called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients. The initial frame
(any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped by the switch, which in turn uses the
client's MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange
with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following
60
form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased
hexadecimal digits. The switch only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method,
so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication,
which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client, using
the Port-Security module. Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the
switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication, and therefore,
MAC-based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.
The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X-based authentication is that
the clients don't need special supplicant software to authenticate. The disadvantage is
that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users - equipment whose MAC address is
a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone. Also, only the MD5-Challenge method is
supported. The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited
using the Port Security Limit Control functionality.
RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled
When RADIUS-Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) on a given
port, the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access-Accept
packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated.
If present and valid, traffic received on the supplicant's port will be classified to the given
QoS Class. If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer
carries a QoS Class or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the
port, the port's QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class (which may be
changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS-assigned).
This option is only available for single-client modes, i.e.
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X0ˋ
RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class:
The User-Priority-Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the
QoS Class in an Access-Accept packet.
Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered, and to be valid,
it must follow this rule:
• All 8 octets in the attribute's value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in
the range '0' - '3', which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range [0; 3].
RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled
When RADIUS-Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given
port, the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access-Accept
packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated.
If present and valid, the port's Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID, the port will
be set to be a member of that VLAN ID, and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware
mode. Once assigned, all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the
RADIUS-assigned VLAN ID.
If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN
ID or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port, the port's
VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID (which may be changed by the
administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS-assigned).
This option is only available for single-client modes, i.e.
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
For trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor→VLANs→VLAN Membership
and VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules have (temporarily) overridden
the current Port VLAN configuration.
RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID:
61
RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an
Access-Accept packet. The following criteria are used:
• The Tunnel-Medium-Type, Tunnel-Type, and Tunnel-Private-Group-ID attributes must all
be present at least once in the Access-Accept packet.
• The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and
fulfil the following requirements (if Tag == 0 is used, the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID does
not need to include a Tag):
- Value of Tunnel-Medium-Type must be set to "IEEE-802" (ordinal 6).
- Value of Tunnel-Type must be set to "VLAN" (ordinal 13).
- Value of Tunnel-Private-Group-ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range '0' - '9',
which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID. Leading '0's are
discarded. The final value must be in the range [1; 4095].
Guest VLAN Enabled
When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port, the
switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined
below.
This option is only available for EAPOL-based modes, i.e.:
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
For trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor→VLANs→VLAN Membership
and VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules have (temporarily) overridden
the current Port VLAN configuration.
Guest VLAN Operation:
When a Guest VLAN enabled port's link comes up, the switch starts transmitting EAPOL
Request Identity frames. If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max,.
Reauth., Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile, the switch
considers entering the Guest VLAN. The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request
Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout. If
Allow guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled, the port will now be placed in the Guest
VLAN. If disabled, the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has
previously been received on the port (this history is cleared if the port link goes down or
the port's Admin State is changed), and if not, the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN.
Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN, but continue transmitting EAPOL Request
Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout.
Once in the Guest VLAN, the port is considered authenticated, and all attached clients on
the port are allowed access on this VLAN. The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success
frame when entering the Guest VLAN.
While in the Guest VLAN, the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames, and if one such
frame is received, the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts
authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode. If an EAPOL frame is received,
the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the "Allow Guest VLAN if
EAPOL Seen" is disabled.
Port State
The current state of the port. It can undertake one of the following values:
Globally Disabled: NAS is globally disabled.
Link Down: NAS is globally enabled, but there is no link on the port.
Authorized: The port is in Force Authorized or a single-supplicant mode and the
supplicant is authorized.
Unauthorized: The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single-supplicant mode and the
supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.
X Auth/Y Unauth: The port is in a multi-supplicant mode. Currently X clients are
authorized and Y are unauthorized.
62
Restart
Two buttons are available for each row. The buttons are only enabled when
authentication is globally enabled and the port's Admin State is in an EAPOL-based or
MAC-based mode.
Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect.
Reauthenticate: Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet-period of the port
runs out (EAPOL-based authentication).For MAC-based authentication, reauthentication
will be attempted immediately.
The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not
cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized.
Reinitialize: Forces a re-initialization of the clients on the port and thereby a
reauthentication immediately. The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while
the reauthentication is in progress.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.4.2.3 Security / Network / Access Control List Configuration
Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port. These parameters will affect
frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE.
The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Policy ID
Select the policy to apply to this port. The allowed values are 0 through 255. The default
value is 0.
63
Action
Select whether forwarding is permitted ("Permit") or denied ("Deny"). The default value
is "Permit".
Rate Limiter ID
Select which rate limiter to apply on this port. The allowed values are Disabled or the
values 1 through 16. The default value is "Disabled".
Port Copy
Select which port frames are copied on. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific
port number. The default value is "Disabled".
Mirror
Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".
Logging
Specify the logging operation of this port. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log.
Disabled : Frames received on the port are not logged.
The default value is "Disabled". Please note that the System Log memory size and logging
rate is limited.
Shutdown
Specify the port shut down operation of this port. The allowed values are:
Enabled: If a frame is received on the port, the port will be disabled.
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled.
The default value is "Disabled".
Counter
Counts the number of frames that match this ACE.
64
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page. Any changes made locally will be undone..
Clear: Click to clear the counter
ACL Rate Limiters Configuration
Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch
Rate Limiter ID
The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row.
Rate
The allowed values are: 0-3276700 in pps
Or 0,100,200,300,…,1000000 in kbps.
65
Unit
Specify the rate unit. The allowed values are:
pps: packets per second.
kbps: Kbits per second.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Access Control List Configuration
This page shows the Access Control List (ACL), which is made up of the ACEs defined on
this switch. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. The maximum number of ACEs is
256 on each switch.
Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list. The reserved ACEs used for
internal protocol, cannot be edited or deleted, the order sequence cannot be changed
and the priority is highest.
66
In
ngress Portt
Indicates the
e ingress port of the AC
CE. Possible values
v
are:
A
All: The ACE
E will match all ingress p
port.
P
Port: The AC
CE will matcch a specific ingress portt.
P
Policy / Bitm
mask
Indicates the
e policy num
mber and bittmask of the
e ACE.
Frame Type
Indicates the
e frame type
e of the ACE
E. Possible va
alues are:
A
Any: The AC
CE will match any frame
e type.
E
EType: The ACE will ma
atch Etherne
et Type fram
mes. Note tha
at an Ethern
net Type bassed ACE
w
will not get matched by
y IP and ARP
P frames.
A
ARP: The AC
CE will match ARP/RARP
P frames.
ames.
IPv4: The AC
CE will matcch all IPv4 fra
IPv4/ICMP: The ACE willl match IPv4
4 frames witth ICMP protocol.
IPv4/UDP: The
T ACE will match IPv4 frames with
h UDP proto
ocol.
IPv4/TCP: Th
he ACE will match IPv4 fframes with
h TCP protocol.
IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPvv4 frames, which
w
are not ICMP/UDP/
P/TCP.
IPv6: The AC
CE will matcch all IPv6 sta
andard fram
mes.
A
Action
Indicates the
e forwarding
g action of tthe ACE.
P
Permit: Fram
mes matchin
ng the ACE m
may be forw
warded and learned.
D
Deny: Frame
es matching
g the ACE arre dropped.
R
Rate Limiter
Indicates the
e rate limiter number off the ACE. The
T allowed range is 1 to
o 16. When
D
Disabled is displayed, the rate limitter operatio
on is disabled.
P
Port Copy
Indicates the
e port copy operation
o
o
of the ACE. Frames
F
matcching the AC
CE are copied to the
p
port numberr. The allowe
ed values arre Disabled or a specificc port numb
ber. When Disabled
D
is displayed, the port copy operatio
on is disabled
d.
M
Mirror
SSpecify the mirror
m
opera
ation of thiss port. Frame
es matching the ACE aree mirrored to
t the
d
destination mirror
m
port. The allowe
ed values are
e:
E
Enabled: Frames received on the p ort are mirrrored.
D
Disabled: Frrames receiv
ved on the p
port are not mirrored.
T
The default value is "Dissabled".
C
Counter
T
The counter indicates th
he number o
of times the ACE was hitt by a framee.
M
Modificatio
on Buttons
Y
You can mod
dify each ACE (Access Co
ontrol Entry)) in the table
e using the ffollowing buttons:
: Inserts a new ACE be
efore the cu
urrent row.
67
: Edits the
e ACE row.
: Moves th
he ACE up th
he list.
: Moves th
he ACE down the list.
: Deletes the
t ACE.
: The lowe
est plus sign adds a new
w entry at the bottom off the ACE lisstings.
B
Buttons
A
Auto-refressh: Check th
his box to reffresh the pa
age automattically. Autom
matic refressh occurs
a
at regular in
ntervals.
R
Refresh: Click to refresh
h the page. Note that non-committ
n
ted changess will be lost.
C
Clear: Click to clear the counter
R
Remove All: Click to re
emove all AC
CEs
A
ACE Configu
uration
C
Configure an
n ACE (Access Control E ntry) on this page.
A
An ACE conssists of severral paramete
ers. These pa
arameters va
ary accordin
ng to the frame type
tthat you sele
ect. First sele
ect the ingre
ess port for the ACE, and then selecct the frame
e type.
D
Different pa
arameter opttions are dissplayed depending on the frame tyype selected.
A frame thatt hits this AC
CE matches the configuration that is defined h
here.
In
ngress Portt
SSelect the ingress port for which th is ACE applies.
A
All: The ACE
E applies to all port.
P
Port n: The ACE appliess to this portt number, where
w
n is the number o
of the switch
h port.
Y
You can sele
ect one port or select mu
ultiple portss for the enttry.
P
Policy Filterr
SSpecify the policy
p
numb
ber filter for this ACE. Th
he policy ID should be th
he same wh
hen you
w
want apply it
i to the ACL
L or Port.
68
Any: No policy filter is specified. (policy filter status is "don't-care".)
Specific: If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE, choose this value. Two field
for entering an policy value and bitmask appears.
Policy Value
When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy value. The
allowed range is 0 to 255.
Policy Bitmask
When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy bitmask.
The allowed range is 0x0 to 0xff.
Select the switch to which this ACE applies. This parameter is reserved to the Stacking
model. If the switch doesn't support stacking, the parameter will not display here.
Any: The ACE applies to any port.
Switch n: The ACE applies to this switch number, where n is the number of the switch.
Frame Type
Select the frame type for this ACE. These frame types are mutually exclusive.
Any: Any frame can match this ACE.
Ethernet Type: Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE. The IEEE 802.3 describes
the value of Length/Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal
(equal to 0600 hexadecimal).
ARP: Only ARP frames can match this ACE. Notice the ARP frames won't match the ACE
with ethernet type.
IPv4: Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv4 frames won't match the ACE
with ethernet type.
IPv6: Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv6 frames won't match the ACE
with ehternet type.
Action
Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.
Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation.
Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.
Rate Limiter
Specify the rate limiter in number of base units. The allowed range is 1 to 16. Disabled
indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.
69
Port Copy
Frames that hit the ACE are copied to the port number specified here. The allowed range
is the same as the switch port number range. Disabled indicates that the port copy
operation is disabled.
Mirror
Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the
destination mirror port. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".
Logging
Specify the logging operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.
Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.
Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.
Shutdown
Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:
Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.
Counter
The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
MAC Parameters
SMAC Filter
(Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP.)
Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No SMAC filter is specified. (SMAC filter status is "don't-care".)
Specific: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE, choose this
value. A field for entering an SMAC value appears.
SMAC Value
When "Specific" is selected for the SMAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC
address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this
SMAC value.
DMAC Filter
Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No DMAC filter is specified. (DMAC filter status is "don't-care".)
MC: Frame must be multicast.
BC: Frame must be broadcast.
UC: Frame must be unicast.
Specific: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE, choose
this value. A field for entering a DMAC value appears.
70
DMAC Value
When "Specific" is selected for the DMAC filter, you can enter a specific destination MAC
address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this
DMAC value.
VLAN Parameters
802.1Q Tagged
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802.1Q tagged. The allowed
values are:
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Enabled: Tagged frame only.
Disabled: Untagged frame only.
The default value is "Any".
VLAN ID Filter
Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE.
Any: No VLAN ID filter is specified. (VLAN ID filter status is "don't-care".)
Specific: If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE, choose this value. A field
for entering a VLAN ID number appears.
VLAN ID
When "Specific" is selected for the VLAN ID filter, you can enter a specific VLAN ID
number. The allowed range is 1 to 4095. A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID
value.
Tag Priority
Specify the tag priority for this ACE. A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority.
The allowed number range is 0 to 7. The value Any means that no tag priority is specified
(tag priority is "don't-care".)
ARP Parameters
The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "ARP" is selected.
ARP/RARP
Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.
Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)
ARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to ARP.
RARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to RARP.
Other: Frame has unknown ARP/RARP Opcode flag.
Request/Reply
Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.
Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)
Request: Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set.
Reply: Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag.
71
Sender IP Filter
Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No sender IP filter is specified. (Sender IP filter is "don't-care".)
Host: Sender IP filter is set to Host. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field
that appears.
Network: Sender IP filter is set to Network. Specify the sender IP address and sender IP
mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
Sender IP Address
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific
sender IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Sender IP Mask
When "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender IP
mask in dotted decimal notation.
Target IP Filter
Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE.
Any: No target IP filter is specified. (Target IP filter is "don't-care".)
Host: Target IP filter is set to Host. Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address
field that appears.
Network: Target IP filter is set to Network. Specify the target IP address and target IP
mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear.
Target IP Address
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific
target IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Target IP Mask
When "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target IP mask
in dotted decimal notation.
ARP SMAC Match
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address
field (SHA) settings.
0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address.
1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
RARP DMAC Match
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address
field (THA) settings.
0: RARP frames where THA is not equal to the DMAC address.
1: RARP frames where THA is equal to the DMAC address.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP/Ethernet Length
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address
length (HLN) and protocol address length (PLN) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is not equal to Ethernet (0x06) or the (PLN) is not
equal to IPv4 (0x04).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is equal to
72
IPv4 (0x04).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address
space (HRD) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is not equal to Ethernet (1).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Ethernet
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP protocol address
space (PRO) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is not equal to IP (0x800).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP Parameters
The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "IPv4" is selected.
IP Protocol Filter
Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE.
Any: No IP protocol filter is specified ("don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE, choose this value.
A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears.
ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP
parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP
parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP parameters
will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
IP Protocol Value
When "Specific" is selected for the IP protocol value, you can enter a specific value. The
allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value.
IP TTL
Specify the Time-to-Live settings for this ACE.
zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must not be able to match
this entry.
non-zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must be able to match
this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP Fragment
Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE. This involves the settings for the More
Fragments (MF) bit and the Fragment Offset (FRAG OFFSET) field for an IPv4 frame.
No: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero
must not be able to match this entry.
Yes: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero
must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
73
IP Option
Specify the options flag setting for this ACE.
No: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry.
Yes: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
SIP Filter
Specify the source IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No source IP filter is specified. (Source IP filter is "don't-care".)
Host: Source IP filter is set to Host. Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field
that appears.
Network: Source IP filter is set to Network. Specify the source IP address and source IP
mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
SIP Address
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP
address in dotted decimal notation.
SIP Mask
When "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP mask in
dotted decimal notation.
DIP Filter
Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No destination IP filter is specified. (Destination IP filter is "don't-care".)
Host: Destination IP filter is set to Host. Specify the destination IP address in the DIP
Address field that appears.
Network: Destination IP filter is set to Network. Specify the destination IP address and
destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear.
DIP Address
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a
specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation.
DIP Mask
When "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP mask
in dotted decimal notation.
ICMP Parameters
ICMP Type Filter
Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP filter is specified (ICMP filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific
ICMP value. A field for entering an ICMP value appears.
ICMP Type Value
When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP filter, you can enter a specific ICMP value. The
allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value.
74
ICMP Code Filter
Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you can enter a
specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code value appears.
ICMP Code Value
When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP code filter, you can enter a specific ICMP code
value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code
value.
TCP/UDP Parameters
TCP/UDP Source Filter
Specify the TCP/UDP source filter for this ACE.
Any: No TCP/UDP source filter is specified (TCP/UDP source filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source filter with this ACE, you can enter
a specific TCP/UDP source value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.
Range: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source range filter with this ACE, you can
enter a specific TCP/UDP source range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value
appears.
TCP/UDP Source No.
When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP
source value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this
TCP/UDP source value.
TCP/UDP Source Range
When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP
source range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches
this TCP/UDP source value.
TCP/UDP Destination Filter
Specify the TCP/UDP destination filter for this ACE.
Any: No TCP/UDP destination filter is specified (TCP/UDP destination filter status is
"don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you can
enter a specific TCP/UDP destination value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination
value appears.
Range: If you want to filter a specific range TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you
can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP
destination value appears.
TCP/UDP Destination Number
When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP destination value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
TCP/UDP Destination Range
75
When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP destination range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this
ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
TCP FIN
Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP SYN
Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP RST
Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP PSH
Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP ACK
Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP URG
Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Ethernet Type Parameters
The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type "Ethernet Type" is
selected.
EtherType Filter
Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE.
Any: No EtherType filter is specified (EtherType filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE, you can enter a
specific EtherType value. A field for entering a EtherType value appears.
Ethernet Type Value
76
When "Specific" is selected for the EtherType filter, you can enter a specific EtherType
value. The allowed range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF but excluding 0x800(IPv4), 0x806(ARP) and
0x86DD(IPv6). A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Cancel: Return to the previous page.
4.4.2.4 Switch / Network / DHCP Configuration
DHCP Snooping Configuration
Configure DHCP Snooping on this page.
Snooping Mode
Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When DHCP snooping mode operation
is enabled, the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow
reply packets from trusted ports.
Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.
Port Mode
Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes are:
Trusted: Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages.
Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages.
77
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
DHCP Relay Configuration
Configure DHCP Relay on this page.
78
R
Relay Mode
e
Indicates the
e DHCP relay
y mode ope ration. Possible modes are:
a
E
Enabled: En
nable DHCP relay mode operation. When DHCP
P relay modee operation is
e
enabled, the
e agent forw
wards and trransfers DHC
CP messagess between th
he clients an
nd the
sserver when they are no
ot in the sam
me subnet do
omain. And the DHCP b
broadcast message
w
won't be flo
ooded for security consid
derations.
D
Disabled: Disable
D
DHCP
P relay mode
e operation.
R
Relay Serve
er
Indicates the
e DHCP relay
y server IP a ddress. A DH
HCP relay ag
gent is used to forward and to
ttransfer DHC
CP messagess between th
he clients an
nd the serverr when they are not in the same
ssubnet doma
ain.
R
Relay Inform
mation Mo
ode
Indicates the
e DHCP relay
y informatio
on mode opttion operatiion. The opttion 82 circu
uit ID
fformat as "[vvlan_id][mo
odule_id][po
ort_no]". The
e first four characters
c
reepresent the
e VLAN
ID, the fifth and sixth ch
haracters are
e the module ID(in stand
dalone devicce it always equal 0,
in stackable device it me
eans switch ID). ), and th
he last two characters
c
arre the port number.
n
FFor example
e, "00030108
8" means th e DHCP messsage receive
e form VLAN
N ID 3, switcch ID 1,
p
port No 8. And
A the optio
on 82 remotte ID value is equal the switch MAC
C address.
P
Possible mod
des are:
E
Enabled: En
nable DHCP relay inform
mation mode
e operation. When DHC
CP relay info
ormation
m
mode operation is enabled, the age
ent inserts sp
pecific information (opttion 82) into
o a DHCP
m
message when forwardiing to DHCP
P server and removes it from
f
a DHC P message when
w
ttransferring to DHCP client. It only w
works when
n DHCP relay
y operation mode is ena
abled.
D
Disabled: Disable
D
DHCP
P relay inforrmation mod
de operation
n.
R
Relay Inform
mation Policy
Indicates the
e DHCP relay
y informatio
on option po
olicy. When DHCP relay information
n mode
o
operation is enabled, if agent receivves a DHCP message tha
at already co
ontains relay agent
information it will enforce the policcy. And it on
nly works un
nder DHCP iff relay inforrmation
o
operation mode
m
is enab
bled. Possible
e policies are:
R
Replace: Re
eplace the original relayy information when a DHCP messag
ge that alrea
ady
ccontains it iss received.
K
Keep: Keep the origina
al relay info
ormation wh
hen a DHCP message thaat already co
ontains
it is received
d.
D
Drop: Drop the packag
ge when a D
DHCP messag
ge that alrea
ady containss relay inforrmation
is received.
79
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.4.2.5 IP Source Guard Configuration
IP Source Guard Configuration
This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration.
Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration
Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard. All configured
ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled.
Port Mode Configuration
Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port
Mode on a given port are enabled, IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port.
Max Dynamic Clients
Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port. This
value can be 0, 1, 2 or unlimited. If the port mode is enabled and the value of max
dynamic client is equal to 0, it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are
matched in static entries on the specific port.
80
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Translate dynamic to static: Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.
Static IP Source Guard Table
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port
The logical port for the settings.
VLAN ID
The VLAN id for the settings.
IP Address
Allowed Source IP address.
MAC address
Allowed Source MAC address.
Adding new entry
Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table. Specify the Port, VLAN ID, IP
address, and IP Mask for the new entry. Click "Save".
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
81
4.4.2.6 ARP Inspection
ARP Inspection
This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration.
82
Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration
Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection.
Port Mode Configuration
Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port
Mode on a given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Translate dynamic to static: Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.
Static ARP Inspection Table
83
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port
The logical port for the settings.
VLAND ID
The VLAN id for the settings.
MAC Address
Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets.
IP Address
Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets.
Adding new entry
Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table. Specify the Port, VLAN ID,
MAC address, and IP address for the new entry. Click "Save".
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.4.3 Security / AAA Authentication Server Configuration
This page allows you to configure the Authentication Servers.
Common Server Configuration
These setting are common for all of the Authentication Servers.
84
Timeout
The Timeout, which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds, is the maximum
time to wait for a reply from a server. If the server does not reply within this timeframe,
we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server (if any).
RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol, which is unreliable by design. In order to cope
with lost frames, the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length. If a
reply is not received within the subinterval, the request is transmitted again. This
algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to
be dead.
Dead Time
The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds, is the period
during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond
to a previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server
that it has already determined as dead.
Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if
more than one server has been configured.
RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration
The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns,
which are:
#
The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies.
Enabled
Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box.
IP Address/Hostname
The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server. IP address is expressed in
dotted decimal notation.
85
Port
The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server. If the port is set to 0 (zero), the
default port (1812) is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server.
Secret
The secret - up to 29 characters long - shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server
and the switch.
RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration
The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns,
which are:
#
The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies.
Enabled
Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box.
IP Address/Hostname
The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server. IP address is expressed in
dotted decimal notation.
Port
The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server. If the port is set to 0 (zero), the
default port (1813) is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server.
Secret
The secret - up to 29 characters long - shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and
the switch.
TACACS+ Authentication Server Configuration
The table has one row for each TACACS+ Authentication Server and a number of columns,
which are:
#
The TACACS+ Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies.
Enabled
Enable the TACACS+ Authentication Server by checking this box.
86
IP Address/Hostname
The IP address or hostname of the TACACS+ Authentication Server. IP address is expressed
in dotted decimal notation.
Port
The TCP port to use on the TACACS+ Authentication Server. If the port is set to 0 (zero),
the default port (49) is used on the TACACS+ Authentication Server.
Secret
The secret - up to 29 characters long - shared between the TACACS+ Authentication Server
and the switch.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
87
4.5 Aggregation Configuration
Link Aggregation is also known as Port Trunking. It allows user using multiple ports in
parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the
redundancy for higher availability. The switch support both Static and Dynamic link
aggregation, LACP. The switch also supports different Hash mechanism to forward traffic
according to the MAC address or IP, Protocol Port Number.
4.5.1 Static Aggregation
This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group.
The aggregation hash mode settings are global, whereas the aggregation group relate to
the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
Hash Code Contributors
Source MAC Address
The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame.
Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address, or uncheck to disable. By default,
Source MAC Address is enabled.
Destination MAC Address
The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame.
Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address, or uncheck to disable. By default,
Destination MAC Address is disabled.
IP Address
The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable
the use of the IP Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, IP Address is enabled.
88
TCP/UDP Port Number
The TCP/UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame.
Check to enable the use of the TCP/UDP Port Number, or uncheck to disable. By default,
TCP/UDP Port Number is enabled.
Aggregation Group Configuration
Group ID
Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row. Group ID "Normal"
indicates there is no aggregation. Only one group ID is valid per port.
Port Members
Each switch port is listed for each group ID. Select a radio button to include a port in an
aggregation, or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation. By
default, no ports belong to any aggregation group. Only full duplex ports can join an
aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.5.2 LACP - Dynamic Aggregation
This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations, and possibly
change them as well.
89
Port
The switch port number.
LACP Enabled
Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port. LACP will form an aggregation
when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner. LACP can form max 12 LLAGs
per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack.
Key
The Key value incurred by the port, range 1-65535 . The Auto setting will set the key as
appropriate by the physical link speed, 10Mb = 1, 100Mb = 2, 1Gb = 3. Using the Specific
setting, a user-defined value can be entered. Ports with the same Key value can participate
in the same aggregation group, while ports with different keys cannot.
Role
The Role shows the LACP activity status. The Active will transmit LACP packets each
second, while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner (speak if spoken to).
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
90
4.6 Loop Protection
This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations, and
possibly change them as well. The loop protection feature is very important to protect the
unexpected network loop, especially when you install the switch on the internet. The
incorrect installation, failure media, or hacker attacking may create network loop.
The switch supports the Loop Protection feature, the port can be shutdown or log
information per your configuration when the switch do detect the network loop. After
the port is shutdown, it may hard to manually reconnect it, so that there is a shutdown
time timeout design can help re-enable the port link automatically. With the Loop
Protection feature, it can help you to avoid the failure and protect your network.
General Settings
Enable Loop Protection
Controls whether loop protections is enabled (as a whole).
Transmission Time
The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port. valid values are 1 to 10
seconds.
Shutdown Time
The period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is
detected (and the port action shuts down the port). Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds
(7 days). A value of zero will keep a port disabled (until next device restart).
91
Port Configuration
Port
The switch port number of the port.
Enable
Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port.
Action
Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port. The valid values are:
Shutdown Port: Shutdown the port until the Shutdown Time timeout.
Shutdown Port and Log: Shutdown the port and log the status.
Log Only: Only log the status.
Tx Mode
Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU's, or whether it is
just passively looking for looped PDU's.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
92
4.7 Spanning Tree
The switch supports Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP) and Legacy Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
The STP and RSTP is combined and defined in IEEE 802.1D-2004, Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol. The RSTP protocol is applied to single network domain no matter how many
VLANs in your network. In RSTP domain, one of the switch acts as the Root Switch and
block one of the link with highest path cost to avoid network loop. There are maximum 23
level switches within one RSTP domain, the network size may be limited.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is a direct extension of RSTP. It can provide an
independent spanning tree for different VLANs. With the Spanning Tree and VLAN
mapping, each VLAN has its own root and blocking path, the STP region size becomes
lower, the convergence time of topology change becomes faster as well.
There are some important abbreviation as below.
CST (Common Spanning Tree): Common Spanning Tree (CST) interconnects all adjacent
MST regions and acts as a virtual bridge node for communications with STP or RSTP nodes
in the global network.
CIST (Common and Internal Spanning Tree): MSTP connects all bridges and LAN
segments with a single Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). The CIST is formed as a
result of the running spanning tree algorithm between switches that support the STP,
RSTP, MSTP protocols.
MSTI (Multiple Spanning Tree Instance): One VLAN can be mapped to a MSTI. Each
instance has its own root switch, forwarding path, blocking path and table. An MST
Region may contain multiple MSTI.
4.7.1 Spanning Tree / Bridge Setting
This page allows you to configure STP system settings. The settings are used by all STP
Bridge instances in the Switch.
93
Basic Settings
Protocol Version
The STP protocol version setting. Valid values are STP, RSTP, and MSTP.
Bridge Priority
Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority
plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch
forms a Bridge Identifier.
For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, this is the priority of the
STP/RSTP bridge.
Forward Delay
The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding (used in
STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds.
Max Age
The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge.
Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds, and MaxAge must be <= (FwdDelay-1)*2.
Maximum Hop Count
This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the
boundary of an MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its
BPDU information to. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops.
Transmit Hold Count
The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second. When exceeded, transmission of
the next BPDU will be delayed. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU's per second.
Advanced Settings
This section descript the advanced settings of the Spanning Tree Protocol.
Edge Port BPDU Filtering
Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs.
Edge Port BPDU Guard
Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a
BPDU. The port will enter the error-disabled state, and will be removed from the active
topology.
94
Port Error Recovery
Control whether a port in the error-disabled state automatically will be enabled after a
certain time. If recovery is not enabled, ports have to be disabled and re-enabled for
normal STP operation. The condition is also cleared by a system reboot.
Port Error Recovery Timeout
The time to pass before a port in the error-disabled state can be enabled. Valid values are
between 30 and 86400 seconds (24 hours).
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.7.2 Spanning Tree / MSTI Mapping
This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority
configurations, and possibly change them as well.
Configuration Identification
Configuration Name
The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping. Bridges must share the name and
revision (see below), as well as the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping configuration in order to share
spanning trees for MSTI's (Intra-region). The name is at most 32 characters.
95
Configuration Revision
The revision of the MSTI configuration named above. This must be an integer between 0
and 65535.
MSTI Mapping
MSTI
The bridge instance. The CIST is not available for explicit mapping, as it will receive the
VLANs not explicitly mapped.
VLANs Mapped
The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs must be separated with comma and/or
space. A VLAN can only be mapped to oneMSTI. An unused MSTI should just be left empty.
(I.e. not having any VLANs mapped to it.)
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.7.3 Spanning Tree / MSTI Priorities
This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority
configurations, and possibly change them as well.
96
MSTI
The bridge instance. The CIST is the default instance, which is always active
Priority
Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority
plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch
forms a Bridge Identifier.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.7.4 Spanning Tree / CIST Ports
This page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations, and possibly
change them as well.
This page contains settings for physical and aggregated ports.
The STP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page
header.
97
Port
The switch port number of the logical STP port.
STP Enabled
Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port.
Path Cost
Controls the path cost incurred by the port.
The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the
802.1D recommended values.
Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used
when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as
forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to
200000000.
Priority
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical
port cost. (See above).
operEdge (state flag)
Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices. (No
Bridges attached). Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports
(havingoperEdge true) than for other ports.The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge
and AutoEdge fields. This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor->Spanning Tree -> STP
Detailed Bridge Status.
Admin Edge
Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared. (The initial operEdge
state when a port is initialized).
Auto Edge
Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port.
This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU's are received on the port or not.
Restricted Role
If enabled, causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI, even if
it has the best spanning tree priority vector. Such a port will be selected as an Alternate
Port after the Root Port has been selected. If set, it can cause lack of spanning tree
connectivity. It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core
region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology, possibly because those
98
bridges are not under the full control of the administrator. This feature is also known as
Root Guard.
Restricted TCN
If enabled, causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and
topology changes to other ports. If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after
changes in a spanning tree's active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned
station location information. It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges
external to a core region of the network, causing address flushing in that region, possibly
because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical
link state of the attached LANs transits frequently.
BPDU Guard
If enabled, causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU's. Contrary to the
similar bridge setting, the port Edge status does not effect this setting.
A port entering error-disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error
Recovery setting as well.
Point2Point
Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than to a shared
medium. This can be automatically determined, or forced either true or false. Transition to
the forwarding state is faster for point-to-point LANs than for shared media.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.7.5 Spanning Tree MSTI Ports
STP MSTI Port Configuration
This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations, and possibly
change them as well.
99
An MSTI port is a virtual port, which is instantiated separately for each active CIST (physical)
port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port. The MSTI instance
must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options.
This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports.
Apart from the selected MSTI, the STP MSTI port settings also relate to the currently
selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
Port
The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST (and MSTI) port.
Path Cost
Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as
appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the
Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when
establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as
forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to
200000000.
Priority
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical
port cost. (See above).
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
100
4.8 MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)
MVR is shot of Multicast VLAN Registration. The MVR is a protocol for layer 2 network that
enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with client/subscriber VLANs.
MVR is typically used for IPTV-like service. In non-MVR environment, the IPTV source to
different VLAN would be copied multiple copies based on how many client/subscriber
VLANs it would deliver.
The IPTV actually delivers the same source with multiple the same content IP streams, the
duplicated traffic occupies the bandwidth of the uplink port. Once the traffic is heavy,
some unexpected lost or lag appears. However, after MVR enabled, the client/subscriber
VLANs are registered to the same source VLAN, then there is only one source stream will
be delivered to the registered VLANs.
This page provides MVR related configurations.
Most of the settings are global, whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the
currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLAN. In a
multicast television application, a PC or a television with a set-top box can receive the
multicast stream. Multiple set-top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port,
which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port. When a subscriber selects a
101
channel, the set-top box or PC sends an IGMP join message to Switch A to join the
appropriate multicast. Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the
multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports.
MVR Mode
Enable/Disable the Global MVR.
VLAN ID
Specify the Multicast VLAN ID.
Mode
Enable MVR on the port.
102
Type
Specify the MVR port type on the port.
Immediate Leave
Enable the fast leave on the port.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
103
4.9 IPMC (IP Multicast)
IPMC is short of IP Multicast, the switch support IPv4 and IPv6 multicast forwarding and
filtering. The IGMP Snooping defines how to manage IPv4 multicast traffic, the MLD
defines how to manage IPv6 multicast traffic.
4.9.1 IGMP Snooping Configuration
Internet Group Management Protocol Snooping (IGMP Snooping) is a multicast
constraining mechanism that runs on Layer 2 devices to manage and control multicast
groups. By listening to and analyzing IGMP messages, a Layer 2 device running IGMP
Snooping establishes mappings between ports and multicast MAC addresses and forwards
multicast data based on these mappings.
4.9.1.1 Basic Configuration
This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration.
Global Configuration
Snooping Enabled
Enable the Global IGMP Snooping.
112
Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding enabled
Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding. Unregistered IPMCv4 traffic is so-called
unknown multicast. After selected, the unregistered multicast stream will be forwarded
like normal packets. Once you un-selected it, such stream will be discarded.
IGMP SSM Range
SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the
SSM service model for the groups in the address range.
Leave Proxy Enabled
Enable IGMP Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave
messages to the router side.
Proxy Enabled
Enable IGMP Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and
leave messages to the router side.
Port Related Configuration
Router Port
Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that
leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier. Normally, the router port is the
uplink port to the upper L3 Router or IGMP Querier. For example in below figure, the
green port of the 2 switches are Router port.
If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act
as a router port.
Fast Leave
Enable the fast leave on the port.
Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from
the forwarding-table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the
interface. The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group
specified in the original leave message. Fast-leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth
management for all hosts on a switched network, even when multiple multicast groups
are in use simultaneously. This processing applies to IGMP and MLD
Throttling
Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
105
4.9.1.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration
Navigating the IGMP Snooping VLAN Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through
the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20
entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the
lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table.
Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest
VLAN Table match.
The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup.
When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use
the button to start over.
IGMP Snooping VLAN Table Columns
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
IGMP Snooping Enabled
Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping. Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected.
IGMP Querier
Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN.
Compatibility
Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on
the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network. The allowed
selection is IGMP-Auto, Forced IGMPv1, Forced IGMPv2, Forced IGMPv3,default
compatibility value is IGMP-Auto.
RV
Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss
on a network. The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness variable value is 2.
QI
Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the
Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds, default query interval is 125 seconds.
106
QRI
Query Response Interval. The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code
inserted into the periodic General Queries. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of
seconds, default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
LLQI (LMQI for IGMP)
Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented
by the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member Query Count. The
allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default last member query interval is 10
in tenths of seconds (1 second).
URI
Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between
repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group. The allowed range is 0 to
31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.
Buttons
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the “VLAN” input fields.
<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VALN Table, i.e. the entry with
the lowest VLAND ID.
>>: Update the table, staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
Save: To save the configuration.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.9.1.3 IGMP Snooping / Port Group Filtering
IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
107
P
Port
The logical port for the settings.
s
Filtering Groups
The IP Multiccast Group that will be ffiltered.
A
Adding New
w Filtering Group
C
Click to add a new entry to the Grou
up Filtering table. Speciffy the Port, and Filtering Group
o
of the new entry. Click "Save".
W
Warning messsage about the Filterin g Group.
The range off the IP Multticast is 224. 0.0.0 ~239.2
255.255.255
B
Buttons
S
Save: Click to save changes.
R
Reset: Click to
t undo any
y changes m
made locally and revert to
t previouslyy saved values.
4
4.9.2 MLD Snooping
S
Configuratio
on
This section provides
p
MLD Snooping
g related con
nfiguration. The MLD is for IPv6 Mu
ulticast
Snooping. Th
he difference
e between tthe 2 IGMP and
a MLD is that
t
the IGM
MP is applied
d to IPv4
M
Multicast stre
eam, the ML
LD is applied
d to IPv6 Mu
ulticast strea
am. While co
onfiguring the MLD
Snooping con
nfiguration, the only th
hing you nee
ed to undersstand is the IPv6 packet format.
4.9.2.1 Basic Conffiguration
This basic con
nfiguration of the MLD,, IPv6 Multiccast Routing
g.
M
Most of the settings
s
are global, whe
ereas the Ro
outer Port co
onfiguration
n is related to the
cu
urrently sele
ected stack unit,
u
as refle
ected by the
e page header.
S
Snooping En
nabled
Enable the Global MLD Snooping.
S
U
Unregistere
ed IPMCv6 Flooding
F
en
nabled
Enable unreg
gistered IPM
MCv6 traffic fflooding. Ple
ease note th
hat disabling
g unregistered
IP
PMCv6 traffiic flooding may
m lead to failure of Neighbor
N
Disscovery.
108
SSM Range
SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the
SSM service model for the groups in the address range.
Leave Proxy Enabled
Enable MLD Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave
messages to the router side.
Proxy Enabled
Enable MLD Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and
leave messages to the router side.
Router Port
Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that
leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier. Normally, the router port is the
uplink port to the upper L3 Router or IGMP Querier. For example in below figure, the
green port of the 2 switches are Router port.
If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act
as a router port.
Fast Leave
Enable the fast leave on the port.
Throttling
Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.9.2.2 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration
Navigating the MLD Snooping VLAN Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show
the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the
one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table.
109
Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest
VLAN Table match.
The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup.
When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use
the button to start over.
MLD Snooping VLAN Table Columns
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
MLD Snooping Enabled
Enable the per-VLAN MLD Snooping. Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected.
MLD Querier
Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN.
Compatibility
Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on
the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network. The allowed
selection is MLD-Auto, ForcedMLDv1, Forced MLDv2, default compatibility value is
MLD-Auto.
RV
Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss
on a link. The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness variable value is 2.
QI
Query Interval. The Query Interval variable denotes the interval between General
Queries sent by the Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds, default query
interval is 125 seconds.
QRI
Query Response Interval. The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the
Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries. The allowed range
is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default query response interval is 100 in tenths of
seconds (10 seconds).
LLQI
Last Listener Query Interval. The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum
Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast
Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages.
It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code
inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages. The allowed range
is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of
seconds (1 second).
URI
Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between
110
repetitions of a node's initial report of interest in a multicast address. The allowed range
is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.
Buttons
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the “VLAN” input fields.
<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VALN Table, i.e. the entry with
the lowest VLAND ID.
>>: Update the table, staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
4.9.2.3 IPMC / MLD Snooping / Port Group Filtering
MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port
The logical port for the settings.
Filtering Groups
The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered.
Adding New Filtering Group
Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table. Specify the Port and Filtering
Group for the new entry. Click "Save".
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
111
4.10 LLDP Parameters
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a vendor-neutral link layer protocol.
LLDP information is sent by devices from each of their interfaces at a fixed interval, in
the form of an Ethernet Frame. Each frame contains one LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU).
Each LLDPDU is a sequence of Type-Length-Value (TLV) structures. Each LLDP frame
starts with the following mandatory TLVs: Chassis ID, Port ID, and Time-to-Live. The
mandatory TLVs are followed by any number of optional TLVs.
This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings.
4.10.1 LLDP Configuration
Tx Interval
The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbours for having the network
discovery information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP frame is determined
by the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 5 - 32768 seconds.
Tx Hold
Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP
frame shall be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold
multiplied by Tx Interval seconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10 times.
Tx Delay
If some configuration is changed (e.g. the IP address) a new LLDP frame is transmitted,
but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay
seconds. Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Tx Interval value. Valid values are
restricted to 1 - 8192 seconds.
112
Tx Reinit
When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted, an LLDP shutdown
frame is transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the LLDP information isn't
valid anymore. Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame
and a new LLDP initialization. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.
LLDP Port Configuration
The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the
page header.
Port
The switch port number of the logical LLDP port.
Mode
Select LLDP mode.
Rx only: The switch will not send out LLDP information, but LLDP information from
neighbour units is analyzed.
Tx only: The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbours, but will send
out LLDP information.
Disabled: The switch will not send out LLDP information, and will drop LLDP
information received from neighbours.
Enabled: The switch will send out LLDP information, and will analyze LLDP information
received from neighbours.
CDP Aware
Select CDP awareness.
The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames (The switch doesn't
transmit CDP frames). CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled.
Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbours'
table are decoded. All other TLVs are discarded (Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded
CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics.). CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP
neighbours' table as shown below.
CDP TLV "Device ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Chassis ID" field.
CDP TLV "Address" is mapped to the LLDP "Management Address" field. The CDP
address TLV can contain multiple addresses, but only the first address is shown in the
LLDP neighbours table.
CDP TLV "Port ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Port ID" field.
CDP TLV "Version and Platform" is mapped to the LLDP "System Description" field.
Both the CDP and LLDP support "system capabilities", but the CDP capabilities cover
capabilities that are not part of the LLDP. These capabilities are shown as "others" in the
LLDP neighbours' table.
113
If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from
neighbour devices. If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are
terminated by the switch.
Note: When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn't removed
immediately, but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded.
Port Descr
Optional TLV: When checked the "port description" is included in LLDP information
transmitted.
Sys Name
Optional TLV: When checked the "system name" is included in LLDP information
transmitted.
Sys Descr
Optional TLV: When checked the "system description" is included in LLDP information
transmitted.
Sys Capa
Optional TLV: When checked the "system capability" is included in LLDP information
transmitted.
Mgmt Addr
Optional TLV: When checked the "management address" is included in LLDP
information transmitted.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.10.2 LLDP Media Configuration
This page allows you to configure the LLDE-MED. This function applies to VoIP devices
which support LLDP-MED.
114
Fast start repeat count
Fast start repeat count
Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints
is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general. In addition, it is best to
advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular
endpoint types (for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted
voice-capable devices), both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce
security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the
network policy.
With this in mind LLDP-MED defines an LLDP-MED Fast Start interaction between the
protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol, in order to achieve these
related properties. Initially, a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs
in an LLDPDU. Only after an LLDP-MED Endpoint Device is detected, will an LLDP-MED
capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP-MED TLVs in outgoing
LLDPDUs on the associated port. The LLDP-MED application will temporarily speed up
the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second, when a new LLDP-MED
neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP-MED information as fast as possible
to new neighbours.
Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between
neighbours, it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to
increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame. With Fast start
repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission
would be repeated. The recommended value is 4 times, given that 4 LLDP frames with a
1 second interval will be transmitted, when an LLDP frame with new information is
received.
It should be noted that LLDP-MED and the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is only
intended to run on links between LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices and
Endpoint Devices, and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure
elements, including Network Connectivity Devices, or other types of links.
115
Coordinates Location
Latitude
Latitude: Should be normalized to within 0-90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.
It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or south of the
equator.
Longitude
Longitude: Should be normalized to within 0-180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.
It is possible to specify the direction the either East of the prime meridian or West of the
prime meridian.
Altitude
Altitude: SHOULD be normalized to within -32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4
digits.
It is possible to select between two altitude types (floors or meters).
Meters: Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified.
Floors: Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different
floor-to-floor dimensions. An altitude = 0.0 is meaningful even outside a building, and
represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude. Inside a building, 0.0
represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance.
Map Datum
The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options:
WGS84: (Geographical 3D) - World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code 4327, Prime
Meridian Name: Greenwich.
NAD83/NAVD88: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name:
Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988
(NAVD88). This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land, not near
tidal water (which would use Datum = NAD83/MLLW).
NAD83/MLLW: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name:
Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW). This
datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water/sea/ocean.
Civic Address Location
IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic Address
LCI).
Country code
The two-letter ISO 3166 Country code in capital ASCII letters - Example: DK, DE, or US.
State
National subdivisions (state, canton, region, province, prefecture).
116
County
County, perish, gun (Japan), district.
City
City, township, shi (Japan) - Example: Copenhagen.
City district
City division, borough, city district, ward, chou (Japan)
Block (Neighborhood)
Neighborhood block
Street
Street - Example: Poppelvej
Leading Street Direction
Leading street direction - Example: N
Trailing street suffix
Trailing street suffix - Example: SW
Street suffix
Street suffix - Example: Ave, Platz
House no.
House number - Example: 21
House no. suffix
House number suffix - Example: A, 1/2
Landmark
Landmark or vanity address - Example: Columbia University.
Additional location info
Additional location info - Example: South Wing.
Name
Name (residence and office occupant) - Example: Flemming Jahn.
Zip code
Postal /zip code - Example: 2791
117
Building
Building (structure) - Example: Low Library.
Apartment
Unit (Apartment, suite) - Example: Apt 42.
Floor
Floor - Example: 4
Room No.
Room number - Example: 450F.
Place type
Place type - Example: Office.
Postal community name
Postal community name - Example: Leonia.
P.O. Box
Post office box (P.O. Box ) - Example : 12345.
Additional code
Additional code - Example: 1320300003.
Emergency Call Service
Emergency Call Service (e.g. E911 and others), such as defined by TIA or NENA.
Emergency Call Service
Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN
identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN
trunk-based PSAP. This format consists of a numerical digit string, corresponding to the
ELIN to be used for emergency calling.
118
Policies
Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch
issues with the VLAN configuration, along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3
attributes, which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port. Improper
network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that
frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service.
Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific 'real-time'
network policy requirements, such as interactive voice and/or video services.
The network policy attributes advertised are:
1. Layer 2 VLAN ID (IEEE 802.1Q-2003)
2. Layer 2 priority value (IEEE 802.1D-2004)
3. Layer 3 Diffserv code point (DSCP) value (IETF RFC 2474)
This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of
application types supported on a given port. The application types specifically
addressed are:
This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of
application types supported on a given port. The application types specifically
addressed are:
1. Voice
2. Guest Voice
3. Soft phone Voice
4. Video Conferencing
5. Streaming Veido
6. Control / Signaling ( Conditionally support a separate network policy for the media
types above )
A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization, and
different policies per application type. LLDP-MED allows multiple policies to be
119
advertised per port, each corresponding to a different application type. Different ports
on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies, based
on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.
It should be noted that LLDP-MED is not intended to run on links other than between
Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints, and therefore does not need to advertise
the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to
the LAN.
Delete
Check to delete the policy. It will be deleted during the next save.
Policy ID
ID for the policy. This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices
that shall be mapped to the specific ports.
Application Type
Intended use of the application types:
1. Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances
supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate
VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data
applications.
2. Voice Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a different
policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media. This application type should not
be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice
application policy.
3. Guest Voice - support a separate 'limited feature-set' voice service for guest users
and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances
supporting interactive voice services.
4. Guest Voice Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a
different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media. This
application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those
advertised in the Guest Voice application policy.
5. Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices,
such as PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple
VLANs, if at all, and are typically configured to use an 'untagged' VLAN or a single
'tagged' data specific VLAN. When a network policy is defined for use with an
'untagged' VLAN (see Tagged flag below), then the L2 priority field is ignored and only
the DSCP value has relevance.
6. Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and
other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.
7. Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution
and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific
network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not
be an intended use of this application type.
8. Video Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a
separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media. This application type
should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in
the Video Conferencing application policy.
120
Tag
Tag: Indicating whether the specified application type is using a 'tagged' or an
'untagged' VLAN.
Untagged: Indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such
does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In this case, both the
VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has
relevance.
Tagged: Indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format, and
that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used, as well as the
DSCP value. The tagged format includes an additional field, known as the tag header.
The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE
802.1Q-2003.
VLAN ID
VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
L2 Priority
L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. L2
Priority may specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE
802.1D-2004. A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE
802.1D-2004.
DSCP
DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application
type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values (0
through 63). A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC
2475.
Adding a new policy
Click to add a new policy. Specify the Application type, Tag, VLAN ID, L2 Priority and
DSCP for the new policy. Click "Save".
Port Policies Configuration
Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the
same network policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.
Port
The port number to which the configuration applies.
Policy Id
The set of policies that shall apply to a given port. The set of policies is selected by check
marking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies.
121
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
122
4.11 sFlow Configuration
Sampled Flow (sFlow) is a traffic monitoring technology mainly used to collect and
analyze traffic statistics. The switch supports sFlow feature. The sFlow software agent
collects traffic statistics and packet information from the sFlow-enabled interfaces on
the switch, encapsulates them into sFlow packets. The sFlow agent then sends the
packet to a specified sFlow collector, the IP Address you assigned in the switch UI. The
sFlow collector analyzes the sFlow packets and displays the result.
sFlow has the following two sampling mechanisms:
* Flow sampling: Packet-based sampling, used to obtain packet content information.
* Counter sampling: Time-based sampling, used to obtain port traffic statistics.
Type the IP address of sFlow collector in the Receiver Configuration. The sFlow agent
will send the collected information to it.
This next page displays the configured sFlow Samplers on the switch.
123
sFlow Ports
List of the port numbers on which sFlow is configured.
sFlow Instance
Configured sFlow instance for the port number.
Flow Sampling
Packet flow sampling refers to arbitrarily choosing some packets out of a specified
number, reading the first "Max Hdr Size" bytes and exporting the sampled datagram
for analysis.
The attributes associated with the flow sampling are: sampler type, sampling rate,
maximum header size.
Sampler Type
Configured sampler type on the port and could be any of the types: None, RX,TX, ALL.
Default value is "none".
Sampling Rate
Configured sampling rate on the ports.
Max Hdr Size
Configured size of the header of the sampled frame.
Counter Sampling
Counter sampling performs periodic, time-based sampling or polling of counters
124
associated with an interfface enabled
d for sFlow.
A
Attribute associated with
h counter sa
ampling is polling interv
val.
P
Polling Inte
erval
C
Configured polling
p
interval for the ccounter sam
mpling.
E
Editing Buttton
Y
You can mod
dify each porrt's sampler configuratio
on the table
e using the f ollowing bu
utton:
: Edits the
e port sampler configura
ation.
125
4
4.12 MAC Address
A
Ta
able Conffiguration
The MAC Add
dress Table is configure
ed on this pa
age. Set time
eouts for en
ntries in the
dynamic MAC
C Table and configure tthe static MA
AC table herre.
A
Aging Confiiguration
By default, dynamic entrries are remo
oved from the MAC tab
ble after 3000 seconds. Th
his
re
emoval is alsso called aging.
C
Configure ag
ging time by
y entering a value here in seconds; for
f examplee, Age time
secon
nds.
The allowed range is 10 to 1000000
0 seconds.
D
Disable the automatic
a
ag
ging of dyna
amic entries by checking
g
aging.
Disab
ble automatic
M
MAC Table Learning
L
Iff the learnin
ng mode for a given porrt is greyed out,
o
another module is in control of
o the
m
mode, so tha
at it cannot be
b changed by the user. An example of such a module is th
he
M
MAC-Based Authenticati
A
ion under 80
02.1X.
Each port can
n do learning based upo
on the follow
wing setting
gs:
A
Auto
Le
earning is done automa
atically as so
oon as a fram
me with unk
known SMAC
C is received
d.
D
Disable
N
No learning is
i done.
S
Secure
O
Only static MAC
M
entries are
a learned,, all other frames are drropped.
N
Note: Make sure that th
he link used for managin
ng the switcch is added tto the Staticc Mac
126
Table before changing to secure learning mode, otherwise the management link is lost
and can only be restored by using another non-secure port or by connecting to the
switch via the serial interface.
Static MAC Table Configuration
The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The static MAC table can
contain 64 entries.
The table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
127
MAC Address
The MAC address of the entry.
Port Members
Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry. Check or uncheck as needed
to modify the entry.
Adding a New Static Entry
Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table. Specify the VLAN ID, MAC address, and
port members for the new entry. Click "Save".
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
128
4.13 VLAN (Virtual LAN)
The VLAN is short of Virtual LAN (Local Area Network.) The VLAN technology allows
you to divide the physical ports to different logical groups. Each groups is a virtual LAN,
the clients within the VLAN is a broadcast domain. While the clients in different VLANs
need to communicate, the VLAN Overlapping setting or an additional upper router is
needed.
There are 2 typical types VLAN technology, Port-Based and Tag Based. The Port-based
VLAN is the simplest approach to LAN implementation. The idea is to assign the ports
on a switch to different VLANs, the settings is only applied to the ports of the switch.
Tag-based VLAN follows IEEE 802.1Q technology to tag VLAN ID to the packets. The
tagged VID is not only apply to the switch, but also can be forwarded to next switch
and whole network depends on how you configuring the switch settings.
4.13.1 VLAN Membership Configuration
The VLAN membership configuration for the switch can be monitored and modified
here. Up to 4096 VLANs are supported. This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs
as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN.
Navigating the VLAN Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show
the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the
one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table.
Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next
VLAN Table match. The will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a
basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown
in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.
143
D
Delete
To
o delete a VLAN
V
entry, check
c
this bo
ox. The entrry will be deleted durin
ng the next Save.
V
VLAN ID
In
ndicates the ID of this particular VLA
AN.
V
VLAN Name
e
In
ndicates the name of the VLAN. Ma
aximum leng
gth of the VL
LAN Name SString is 32. VLAN
N
Name can on
nly contain alphabets
a
orr numbers. VLAN
V
name should conttain at least one
alphabet. VLA
AN name ca
an be edited
d for the exissting VLAN entries or it can be added to
th
he new entrries.
P
Port Membe
ers
A row of che
eck boxes forr each port iis displayed for each VL
LAN ID.
he box as .
To
o include a port in a VLAN, check th
To
o include a port in a forrbidden porrt list, check the box as shown
s
.
To
o remove orr exclude the
e port from the VLAN, make
m
sure the box is un
nchecked as show
.
By default, no ports are members, a nd for every
y new VLAN entry all bo
oxes are
unchecked.
A
Adding a Ne
ew VLAN
C
Click to add a new VLAN
N ID. An emp
pty row is ad
dded to the table, and tthe VLAN ca
an be
co
onfigured as needed. Le
egal values ffor a VLAN ID are 1 thro
ough 4095.
The VLAN is enabled
e
when
w
you clicck on "Save". A VLAN without
w
any port membe
ers
w
will be delete
ed when you
u click "Save
e".
130
The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed the table starting from the “VLAND ID” input fields.
<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VALN Table, i.e. the entry with
the lowest VLAND ID.
>>: Update the table, staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
4.13.2 VLAN Port Configuration
This page is used for configuring the selected stack switch unit port VLAN.
This page is used for configuring the switch port VLAN.
131
Ether type for Custom S-ports
This field specifies the ether type used for Custom S-ports. This is a global setting for all
the Custom S-ports.
Port
This is the logical port number of this row.
Port Type
Port can be one of the following types: Unaware, Customer port(C-port), Service
port(S-port), Custom Service port(S-custom-port)
If Port Type is Unaware, all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not
removed.
Ingress Filtering
Enable ingress filtering on a port by checking the box. This parameter affects VLAN
ingress processing. If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of
the classified VLAN of the frame, the frame is discarded. By default, ingress filtering is
disabled (no checkmark).
Frame Type
Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged/untagged frames. This
parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged frames,
untagged frames received on the port are discarded. By default, the field is set to All.
Port VLAN Mode
Configures the Port VLAN Mode. The allowed values are None or Specific This
parameter affects VLAN ingress and egress processing.
If None is selected, a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in frames
transmitted on the port. This mode is normally used for ports connected to VLAN aware
switches.
If Specific (the default value) is selected, a Port VLAN ID can be configured (see below).
Untagged frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID. If VLAN
awareness is disabled, all frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID.
If the classified VLAN ID of a frame transmitted on the port is different from the Port
VLAN ID, a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in the frame.
Port VLAN ID
Configures the VLAN identifier for the port. The allowed values are 1 through 4095.
The default value is 1.
Note: The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID.
Tx Tag
Determines egress tagging of a port. Untag pvid - All VLANs except the configured PVID
will be tagged. Tag_all - All VLANs are tagged. Untag all - All VLANs are untagged.
132
133
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
134
4.14 Private VLANs
The Private VLAN feature provides the ability to extend the capabilities of a "standard"
VLAN. The additional concepts, Primary VLAN, Community VLAN and Isolated VLAN are
introduced in Private VLAN.
The Primary VLAN can be considered the master in the master/slave relationship with
the other 2 sub-types, Community VLAN and Isolated VLAN. The switch Ports assigned
with the primary VLAN are able to access the ports in the 2 sub-tyupes.
Both the Community VLN and Isolated VLAN can be considered slaves in the
master/slave relationship with the primary VLAN. The switch ports assigned to a
Community VLAN can see traffic from all other devices in the same Community. The
switch ports assigned to an Isolated VLAN can send traffic to the primary VLAN, but
CANNOT see traffic from other devices in the same Isolated VLAN.
In this section, the switch allows you to assign Private VLAN Member Configuration and
Port Isolation Configuration.
4.14.1 Private VLAN Membership Configuration
The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and
modified here. Private VLANs can be added or deleted here. Port members of each
Private VLAN can be added or removed here.
Private VLANs are based on the source port mask, and there are no connections to
VLANs. This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical.
A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward
packets. By default, all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private
VLAN 1.
A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN, but it can be a member of
multiple Private VLANs.
Private VLANs do not work across the stack.
143
Delete
To delete a private VLAN entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next
save.
Private VLAN ID
Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN.
Port Members
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID. To include a
port in a Private VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the Private
VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes
are unchecked.
Adding a New Private VLAN
Click to add a new private VLAN ID. An empty row is added to the table, and the private
VLAN can be configured as needed. The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the
same as the switch port number range. Any values outside this range are not accepted,
and a warning message appears. Click "OK" to discard the incorrect entry, or click
"Cancel" to return to the editing and make a correction.
The Private VLAN is enabled when you click "Save".
The button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.14.2 Port Isolation Configuration
Overview
This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN.
136
A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and
Private VLAN.
The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page
header.
This feature works across the stack.
Configuration
Port Members
A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN. When checked, port isolation is
enabled on that port. When unchecked, port isolation is disabled on that port.
By default, port isolation is disabled on all ports.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
137
4.15 VCL
4.15.1 VCL / MAC-Based VLAN Configuration
The MAC-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This page allows for adding and
deleting MAC-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This
page shows only static entries.
Delete
To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entry will be
deleted in the stack.
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address.
VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID.
Port Members
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC-based VLAN entry. To
include a port in a MAC-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from
the MAC-based VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are
members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New MAC-based VLAN
Click to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry. An empty row is added to the table, and the
MAC-based VLAN entry can be configured as needed. Any unicast MAC address can be
configured for the MAC-based VLAN entry. No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses
are allowed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.
143
The MAC-based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on "Save". A MAC-based VLAN
without any port members will be deleted when you click "Save".
The button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC-based VLANs.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed the table starting from the “VLAND ID” input fields.
<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VALN Table, i.e. the entry with
the lowest VLAND ID.
>>: Update the table, staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
4.15.2 VCL / Protocol-based VLAN
Protocol to Group Mapping Table
This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name (unique for each Group)
mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the
switch.
The displayed settings are:
Delete
To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted
on the switch during the next Save.
Frame Type
Frame Type can have one of the following values:
1.
Ethernet
139
2.
LLC
3.
SNAP
Note: On changing the Frame type field, valid value of the following text field will vary
depending on the new frame type you selected.
Value
Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from
the preceding Frame Type selection menu.
Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types:
For Ethernet: Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is
called etype. Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600-0xffff
For LLC: Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub-values.
a. DSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)
b. SSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)
For SNAP: Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub-values.
a. OUI: OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) is value in format of xx-xx-xx where
each pair (xx) in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00-0xff.
b. PID: If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000, the protocol ID is the Ethernet type (EtherType)
field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP; if the OUI is an OUI for a particular
organization, the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol
running on top of SNAP.
In other words, if value of OUI field is 00-00-00 then value of PID will be etype
(0x0600-0xffff) and if value of OUI is other than 00-00-00 then valid value of PID will be
any value from 0x0000 to 0xffff.
Group Name
A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character long string for every entry which consists
of a combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers (0-9).
Note: special character and underscore (_) are not allowed.
Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry
Click to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the table; Frame
Type, Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed.
The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
140
VLC / Protocol-based VLAN / Group Name to VLAN mapping Table
This page allows you to map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the
switch. The displayed settings are:
Delete
To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted
on the switch during the next Save
Group Name
A valid Group Name is a string of at most 16 characters which consists of a combination
of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers (0-9), no special character is allowed. Whichever
Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping
table and must not be pre-used by any other existing mapping entry on this page.
VLAD ID
Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped. A valid VLAN ID ranges from
1-4095.
Port Members
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID
mapping. To include a port in a mapping, check the box. To remove or exclude the port
from the mapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members,
and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry
Click to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the table, the
Group Name, VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed. Legal values for
a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.
The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.
141
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.15.3 VCL / IP Subnet-based VLAN
The IP subnet-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This page allows for adding,
updating and deleting IP subnet-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to
different ports. This page shows only static entries.
Delete
To delete a IP subnet-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entry will be
deleted in the stack.
VCE ID
Indicates the index of the entry. It is user configurable. It's value ranges from 0-256. If a
VCE ID is 0, application will auto-generate the VCE ID for that entry. Deletion and
lookup of IP subnet-based VLAN are based on VCE ID.
IP Address
Indicates the IP address.
Mask Length
Indicates the network mask length.
VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID. VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries.
Port Members
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet-based VLAN entry. To
142
in
nclude a porrt in a IP sub
bnet-based V
VLAN, check
k the box. To
o remove or exclude the
e port
frrom the IP subnet-based
d VLAN, mak
ke sure the box is unche
ecked. By deefault, no po
orts
are memberss, and all box
xes are unch
hecked.
A
Adding a Ne
ew IP subn
net-based V
VLAN
C
Click "Add New
N
Entry"
" to add a ne
ew IP subne
et-based VLA
AN entry. An
n empty row
w is
added to the
e table, and the IP subne
et-based VLA
AN entry can be configu
ured as need
ded.
A
Any IP address/mask can be configurred for the IP subnet-based VLAN e ntry. Legal values
v
fo
or a VLAN ID
D are 1 through 4095.
The IP subnett-based VLA
AN entry is e
enabled whe
en you click on "Save". TThe "Delete
e"
b
button can be
b used to un
ndo the add
dition of new
w IP subnet-based VLAN
Ns.
B
Buttons
S
Save: Click to
o save chang
ges.
R
Reset: Click to
t undo any
y changes m ade locally and
a revert to previouslyy saved values.
A
Auto-refresh
: Checck this box to
o refresh the page auto
omatically. A
Automatic re
efresh
o
occurs every 3 seconds.
R
Refresh: Reffreshes the displayed
d
ta ble.
143
4.16 Voice VLAN Configuration
4.16.1 Voice VLAN / Configuration
The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, then the
switch can classify and schedule network traffic. It is recommended that there be two
VLANs on a port - one for voice, one for data. Before connecting the IP device to the
switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAND ID correctly. It should be
configured through its own GUI.
Mode
Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. We must disable MSTP feature before we
enable Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation.
Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN mode operation.
VLAN ID
Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot
equal each port PVID. It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management
VID, MVR VID, PVID etc. The allowed range is 1 to 4095.
Aging Time
Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning aging time. The allowed range is 10 to
1000000 seconds. It is used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled. In
other cases, it will be based on hardware aging time. The actual aging time will be
situated between the [age time; 2 * age time] interval.
143
Traffic Class
Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class. All traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply this class.
Port Mode
Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode.
Possible modes are:
Disabled: from Voice VLAN.
Auto: Enable auto detect mode. It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the
specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically.
Forced: Force join to Voice VLAN.
Port Security
the Voice VLAN port security mode. When the function is enabled, all non-telephonic
MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds. Possible port modes
are:
Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Port Discovery Protocol
Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol. It will only work when auto detect
mode is enabled. We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol
to "LLDP" or "Both". Changing the discovery protocol to "OUI" or "LLDP" will restart
auto detect process. Possible discovery protocols are:
OUI: Detect telephony device by OUI address.
LLDP: Detect telephony device by LLDP.
Both: Both OUI and LLDP.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.16.2 Voice VLAN / OUI Configuration
Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page. The maximum entry number is 16.
Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process.
145
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Telephony OUI
A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. It
must be 6 characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-xx" (x is a hexadecimal digit).
Description
The description of OUI address. Normally, it describes which vendor telephony device it
belongs to. The allowed string length is 0 to 32.
Buttons
Add new entry: Click to add a new access management entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed the table starting from the “VLAND ID” input fields.
<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VALN Table, i.e. the entry with
the lowest VLAND
146
4.17 QoS
4.17.1 QoS / Ingress Port Classification
This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all
switch ports.
The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings are:
Port
The port number for which the configuration below applies.
QoS class
Controls the default QoS class, i.e., the QoS class for frames not classified in any other
way. There is a one to one mapping between QoS class, queue and priority. A QoS class
of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.
DP level
Controls the default Drop Precedence Level i.e., the DP level for frames not classified in
any other way.
PCP
Controls the default PCP for untagged frames.
DEI
Controls the default DEI for untagged frames.
Tag Class.
Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port.
143
Disabled: Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames.
Enabled: Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames.
Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and/or mapping.
DSCP Based
Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.17.2 QoS / Ingress Port Policer Config
This page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports. The settings
relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings are:
Port
The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Enabled
Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port.
Rate
Controls the rate for the policer. The default value is 500. This value is restricted to
100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps" or "fps", and it is restricted to 1-3300 when the
"Unit" is "Mbps" or "kfps".
148
149
Unit
Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps, Mbps, fps or kfps . The default
value is "kbps".
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.17.3 QoS / Port Scheduler
This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports.
The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings are:
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers.
Mode
Shows the scheduling mode for this port.
Qn
Shows the weight for this queue and port.
4.17.4 QoS / Egress Port Shapers
This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports.
The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
150
The displayed settings are:
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers.
Qn
Shows "disabled" or actual queue shaper rate - e.g. "800 Mbps".
Port
Shows "disabled" or actual port shaper rate - e.g. "800 Mbps".
4.17.5 QoS / Port Tag Remarking
This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports.
The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings are:
151
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking.
Mode
Shows the tag remarking mode for this port.
Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values.
Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.
Mapped: Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level.
QoS / DSCP
4.17.6 QoS / Port DSCP Configuration
This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all
switch ports.
The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings are:
152
Port
The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and
egress settings.
Ingress
In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for
individual ports.
There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress:
1. Translate
2. Classify
1. Translate
To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox.
2. Classify
Classification for a port have 4 different values.
Disabled: No Ingress DSCP Classification.
DSCP=0: Classify if incoming (or translated if enabled) DSCP is 0.
Selected: Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in
DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP.
All: Classify all DSCP.
Egress
Port Egress Rewriting can be one of Disabled: No Egress rewrite.
Enable: Rewrite enabled without remapping.
Remap DP Unaware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with
remapped DSCP value. The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the 'DSCP
Translation->Egress Remap DP0' table.
153
Remap DP Aware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with
remapped DSCP value. Depending on the DP level of the frame, the remapped DSCP
value is either taken from the 'DSCP Translation->Egress Remap DP0' table or from the
'DSCP Translation->Egress Remap DP1' table.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.17.7 QoS / DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification
This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification
settings for all switches.
The displayed settings are:
154
DSCP
Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64.
Trust
Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted. Only frames with trusted DSCP values
are mapped to a specific QOs class and Drop Precedence Level. Frames with un- trusted
DSCP values are treated as a non-IP frame.
QoS Class
QoS class value can be any of (0-7)
DPL
Drop Precedence Level (0-1)
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.17.8 QoS / DSCP Translation
This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all
switches. DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress.
155
The displayed settings are:
DSCP
Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0
to 63.
Ingress
Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS
class and DPL map.
There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation 1. Translate
2. Classify
1. Translate
DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of (0-63) DSCP values.
2. Classify
Click to enable Classification at Ingress side.
156
Egress
There are the following configurable parameters for Egress side 1. Remap DP0 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 0.
2. Remap DP1 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 1.
1. Remap DP0
Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges
from 0 to 63.
2. Remap DP1
Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges
from 0 to 63.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.17.9 QoS / DSCP Classification
This page allows you to configure the mapping of QoS class and Drop Precedence Level
to DSCP value.
The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings are:
QoS Class
Actual QoS class.
157
D
DPL
A
Actual Drop Precedence Level.
D
DSCP
Se
elect the cla
assified DSCP
P value (0-63
3).
B
Buttons
S
Save: Click to save changes.
R
Reset: Click to
t undo any
y changes m
made locally and revert to
t previouslyy saved values.
4.17.10
0 QoS / Control List Co
onfiguratio
on
Q
QoS Control List Confiiguration
This page sho
ows the QoS
S Control Lisst (QCL), which is made up of the Q
QCEs. Each ro
ow
describes a QCE
Q that is defined. The maximum number
n
of QCEs
Q
is 256 o
on each swittch.
C
Click on the lowest
l
plus sign to add a new QCE to the list.
158
QCE#
Indicates the index of QCE.
Port
Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
Frame Type
Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Possible frame types are:
Any: The QCE will match all frame type.
Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.
LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.
SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.
IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.
IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.
SMAC
Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address, i.e. first three octet (byte) of MAC
address.
DMAC
Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame. Possible values are:
Any: All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed.
Unicast: Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed.
Multicast: Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed.
Broadcast: Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowed.
The default value is 'Any'.
VID
Indicates (VLAN ID), either a specific VID or range of VIDs. VID can be in the range
1-4095 or 'Any'
PCP
Priority Code Point: Valid value PCP are specific(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range(0-1, 2-3, 4-5,
6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or 'Any'.
DEI
Drop Eligible Indicator: Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0, 1 or 'Any'.
Conflict
Displays QCE status. It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not
available, in that case it shows conflict status as 'Yes', otherwise it is always 'No’. Please
note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the resource required by the QCE and
pressing 'Refresh' button.
159
A
Action
In
ndicates the classificatio
on action tak
ken on ingre
ess frame if parameters configured are
m
matched with
h the frame's content.
There are thrree action fields: Class, D
DPL and DSC
CP.
C
Class: Classiffied QoS classs..
D
DPL: Classifie
ed Drop Preccedence Levvel.
D
DSCP: Classiffied DSCP va
alue.
M
Modificatio
on Buttons
Y
You can mod
dify each QCE (QoS Conttrol Entry) in
n the table using
u
the fo llowing buttons:
: Inserts a new QCE be
efore the cu
urrent row.
e QCE.
: Edits the
: Moves th
he QCE up th
he list.
: Moves th
he QCE down the list.
: Deletes the
t QCE.
: The lowe
est plus sign adds a new
w entry at the bottom off the QCE lisstings.
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page. T
This will help to check the latest co
onflict statuss after
re
eleasing the
e resources.
4.17.11 QoS / Storrm Control Configura
ation
Sttorm contro
ol for the sw
witch is config
gured on th
his page.
160
There is a unicast storm rate control, multicast storm rate control, and a broadcast storm
rate control. These only affect flooded frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair
not present on the MAC Address table.
The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast, multicast or
broadcast traffic across the switch.
Note: Frames, which are sent to the CPU of the switch are always limited to
approximately 4 kpps. For example, broadcasts in the management VLAN are limited to
this rate. The management VLAN is configured on the IP setup page.
Frame Type
The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here: Unicast, Multicast or
Broadcast.
Enable
Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type.
Rate
The rate unit is packets per second (pps). Valid values
are:1,2,4,8,16,32,64,128,256,512,1K,2K,4K,8K,16K,32K,64K,128K,256K,512K,102
4K,2048K,4096K,8192K,16384K or 32768K.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
161
4.18 Mirroring Configuration
Configure port Mirroring on this page.
To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or mirrored, on a mirror
port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow.
The traffic to be copied on the mirror port is selected as follows:
All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring).
All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination mirroring).
Port to mirror on
Port to mirror also known as the mirror port. Frames from ports that have either
source (rx) or destination (tx) mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port. Disabled
disables mirroring.
Mirror Port Configuration
The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling.
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Mode
Select mirror mode.
Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port. Frames
transmitted are not mirrored.
Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port. Frames
received are not mirrored.
Disabled: Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored.
160
Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port.
Note: For a given port, a frame is only transmitted once. It is therefore not possible to
mirror Tx frames on the mirror port. Because of this, mode for the selected mirror
port is limited to Disabled or Rx only.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.19 UPnP Configuration
Configure UPnP on this page.
Mode
Indicates the UPnP operation mode. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable UPnP mode operation.
Disabled: Disable UPnP mode operation.
When the mode is enabled, two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related
packets to CPU. The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled.
TTL
The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages. Valid values are in
the range 1 to 255.
Advertising Duration
The duration, carried in SSDP packets, is used to inform a control point or control points
how often it or they should receive an SSDP advertisement message from this switch. If
a control point does not receive any message within the duration, it will think that the
switch no longer exists. Due to the unreliable nature of UDP, in the standard it is
163
recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one-half
of the advertising duration. In the implementation, the switch sends SSDP messages
periodically at the interval one-half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds. Valid
values are in the range 100 to 86400.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
164
4.20 Stack Configuration
Overview: Monitor - Ports – State
Configuration – Stack
165
Monitor - Stack
The ALL-SG8826MX-10G includes a stacking feature by using two SFP+ ports. This
allows multiple switches (up to 16) to operate as a single unit. You can set the stack
configuration here.
Within a managed stack, one master switch (or just "master") must be elected. Any
switch not being master is a slave switch (or just "slave").
To elect a master, the following criteria are evaluated sequentially:
1. If any switch already claims to have been master for more than 30
seconds, then that switch will become master.
2. If multiple switches claim to have been master for more than 30 seconds,
then the switch which has been master for the longest period of time
will become master.
3. The switch with the highest stack priority.
4. The switch with the smallest MAC address.
The above algorithm ensures that once a master has been elected and has been
master for more than 30 seconds, it will remain master. However in some cases the
user may want to enforce a new master election. This is done by clicking "Start
Master Election", followed by "Save". This causes the first two criteria to be
ignored, thereby basing master election only on master priority and MAC address.
When master election is enforced, the first two criteria are ignored for a period of
10-15 seconds. On the Stack State Monitor web page, this is shown by "Reelect"
being set to "Yes" for one of the switches in the stack.
NOTE:
When stacking a PoE switch with a non-PoE switch, one PoE switch must
always be the master. This switch should have the highest priority in the
stack (highest priority is number “1”).
166
Stacking State
Indicates the stacking operation mode. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable stacking mode operation.
Disabled: Disable stacking mode operation.
When the stacking mode is enabled, multiple switches will operate as one single unit.
Stacking Unit Table
This table displays all the switches (ALL-SG8826MX-10G) stacked. You can check the Delete
checkbox to delete the selected switch, change the Switch ID, change the Priority, or change
the Stack Ports here with the scroll-down menus. Also, you can view the status of all the
switches that are stacked here.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
167
5. Feature Configuration - CLI
The Command Line Interface (CLI) is the user interface to the switch’s embedded
software system. You can view the system information, show the status, configure the
switch and receive a response back from the system by keying in a command.
After login the switch through console CLI, you can see the ">" mark. You can type the
command after it. There are some useful command, such as:
Type '<group>' to enter command group, e.g. 'port' to the port configuration.
Type '<group> ?' to get list of group commands, e.g. 'port ?'. You can follow the
instruction step by step to finish the command.
Type '<command> ?' to get help on a command, e.g. 'port mode ?'.
Type 'up' to move up one level or '/' to go to root level
Type "logout" in root level to leave the command line interface
Click "Enter" key after finish the command.
Click "Up" key to repeat the previous commands
Commands may be abbreviated, e.g. 'por co' instead of 'port configuration'. For quick
configuration, the abbreviated typo is helpful.
Example: Configure the System Contact to Orwell
You can go to system group or type the full name in root level. Both of the methods
can meet your need.
In system group mode:
System>contact Orwell
In root level:
>sys contact Orwell
Note: This chapter just lists the relevant command lines of the feature settings for your
reference. You can see the detail explanation of the commands and features through
the chapter 4.
5.1 System Configuration
Feature
Command Line
System Information
System Group
Enter the System Configuration Group to do further
configuration.
>system
Type 'up' to move up one level or '/' to go to root level
System>
System Contact
Syntax:
System Name [<name>]
Parameters:
163
<name>: System name string. (1-255)
Example: Contact Name = Orwell
System>contact Orwell
System Name
Syntax:
System Name [<name>]
Parameters:
<name>: System name string. (1-255)
Example: Contact Name = switch
System>name switch
switch:/>
System Location
(After given system name, the prompt character will be
changed automatically.)
Syntax:
System Location [<location>]
Parameters:
<location>: System location string. (1-255)
Example: Location Name
switch:/System>loca fll_01
Time Zone Offset
Syntax:
System Time zone [<offset>]
Parameters:
<offset>: Time zone offset in minutes (-720 to 720) relative
to UTC
Example: Time Zone = 100
switch:/System>time 100
IP Configuration
IP Group
Enter the IP Configuration Group
switch:/>ip
Type 'up' to move up one level or '/' to go to root level
switch:/IP>
DHCP Client
Syntax:
IP DHCP [enable|disable]
switch:/IP>dhcp en
IP Setting (Address,
Syntax:
Mask, Gateway,
IP Setup [<ip_addr>] [<ip_mask>] [<ip_router>] [<vid>]
Managed VID)
Example: IP=192.168.2.2, Mask=255.255.255.0, Gateway:
192.168.2.254, VID=1
switch:/IP>setup 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.254 1
NTP
Enable NTP Mode by below command:
switch:/IP>ntp mode en
Type the NTP Server address settings by below command:
169
Syntax:
IP NTP Server Add <server_index> <ip_addr_string>
IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add <server_index> <server_ipv6>
IP NTP Server Delete <server_index>
Example:
switch:/IP>ntp ser add 1 192.168.100.1
switch:/IP>ntp ser add 2 168.95.1.1
Check the NTP Server settings by below command:
switch:/IP>ntp conf
IP NTP Configuration:
=====================
NTP Mode : Enabled
Idx Server IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string
-------------------------------------------------------1
192.168.100.1
2
168.95.1.1
3
4
5
DNS Server
Syntax:
IP DNS [<ip_addr>]
Parameters:
<ip_addr>: IP address (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP address
Example:
switch:/IP>dns 168.95.1.1
DNS Proxy
Syntax: IP DNS_Proxy [enable|disable]
switch:/IP>dns_proxy en
IPv6 Configuration
IPv6 Commands
Syntax:
IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG [enable|disable]
IP IPv6 Setup [<ipv6_addr>] [<ipv6_prefix>] [<ipv6_router>]
IP IPv6 State <ipv6_addr> [enable|disable]
IP IPv6 Ping6 <ipv6_addr> [(Length <ping_length>)]
[(Count <ping_count>)] [(Interval <ping_interval>)]
Auto Configuration
Syntax:
IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG [enable|disable]
Example:
switch:/IP>ipv6 auto en
IPv6 Address Setting
Syntax:
(Address, Prefix,
IP IPv6 Setup [<ipv6_addr>] [<ipv6_prefix>] [<ipv6_router>]
170
Router)
Example:
switch:/IP>ipv6 setup 2001:DB8::250:8bff:fee8:f800 48
2001:DB8::250:8bff:fee8:f8ff
IPv6 Ping Test
Syntax:
IP IPv6 Ping6 <ipv6_addr> [(Length <ping_length>)]
[(Count <ping_count>)] [(Interval <ping_interval>)]
Example:
switch:/IP>ipv6 ping6 2001:DB8::250:8bff:fee8:f800
NTP
NTP Mode
Enable NTP Mode by below command:
switch:/IP>ntp mode en
NTP Server Address
Syntax:
Setting
Type the NTP Server address settings by below command:
IP NTP Server Add <server_index> <ip_addr_string>
IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add <server_index> <server_ipv6>
IP NTP Server Delete <server_index>
Example:
switch:/IP>ntp ser add 1 192.168.100.1
switch:/IP>ntp ser add 2 168.95.1.1
NTP Setting Status
Check the NTP Server settings by below command:
switch:/IP>ntp conf
IP NTP Configuration:
=====================
NTP Mode : Enabled
Idx Server IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string
-------------------------------------------------------1
192.168.100.1
2
168.95.1.1
3
4
5
System Log
Server Mode
Syntax:
System Log Server Mode [enable|disable]
Example:
switch:/System>log server mode en
Server Address
Syntax:
System Log Server Address [<ip_addr_string>]
Example:
switch:/System>log server add 192.168.2.100
Syslog Level
Syntax:
System Log Level [info|warning|error]
171
Information:
switch:/System>log level inf
Warning:
switch:/System>log level war
Error:
switch:/System>log level err
Clear Syslog
Syntax:
System Log Clear [all|info|warning|error]
switch:/System>log clear all
System Log
switch:/System>log conf
Configuration
System Log Configuration:
=========================
System Log Server Mode
System Log Server Address
System Log Level
: Enabled
: 192.168.2.100
: Error
5.2 Power Reduction
Feature
Command Line
LED Power Reduction
LED Intensity Times
Syntax:
led_power timers [<hour>] [<intensity>]
Parameters:
<hour> : The hour (0-24) at which to change LEDs intensity
<intensity>: The LED intensity in % (0-100)
Example: (Time=2:00, Intensity: 30%)
led_power>timer 2 30
Maintenance
Syntax:
led_power maintenance [<maintenance_time>]
[on_at_errors|leave_at_errors]
Parameters:
<maintenance_time> : Time in seconds (0-65535) that the
LEDs shall be turned on, when any port changes link state
on_at_errors|leave_at_errors: on_at_error if LEDs shall be
turned on if any errors has been detected. leave_at_errors
if no LED change shall happen when errors have been
detected
Example:
led_power>main 20
led_power>main 20 on
172
(20 sec., on_ad_errors enabled)
EEE Configuration
EEE Port
Configuration
Syntax:
EEE Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports
enable : Enable EEE
disable: Disable EEE
Example: Enable Port 1-5
EEE>mode 1-5 en
Urgent Queue of
Port
Syntax:
EEE Urgent_queues [<port_list>] [<queue_list>]
Parameters:
<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports
<queue_list>: List of queues to configure as urgent queues
(1-8 or none)
Example: Enable Urgent_Queue on Port 1-5
EEE>urge 1-5 2
5.3 Port Configuration
Feature
Command Line
Port Configuration
Port Group
Link State
switch:/>port
Type 'up' to move up one level or '/' to go to root level
switch:/Port>
Syntax:
Port State [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example: Enable/Disable Port 1 State. After port 1
disabled, the port can't access the switch.
Port>state 1 en
Port>state 1 dis
Link Speed and
Duplex
Syntax:
Port Mode [<port_list>]
[auto|10hdx|10fdx|100hdx|100fdx|1000fdx|sfp_auto_ams|10
0
0x_ams|100fx_ams|1000x|100fx]
Example:
Port>mode 2 1000fdx (Configure port 2 to 1000 Full
Duplex)
Port>mode 1-4 1000fdx (Configure port 1-4 to 1000 Full
Duplex)
Flow Control
Syntax:
Port Flow Control [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
173
Example:
Port>flow cont 1 en (Enable Flow Control on Port 1)
Port>flow cont 1 dis (Disable Flow Control on Port 2)
Maximum Frame
Size
Syntax:
Port MaxFrame [<port_list>] [<max_frame>]
Example: Set port 1-24's maximum frame size to 9K jumbo
frame
Port>maxf 1-24 9600
Port Status
Port Status
Port>conf 1-2
Port Configuration:
===================
Port
State
Mode
---- -------- -----------
Flow Control
------------ -------- --------
MaxFrame Power
Excessive
Link
--------- ----
1
Enabled
Auto
Disabled
9600
Disabled Discard
Down
2
Enabled
Auto
Disabled
9600
Disabled Discard
1Gfdx
Flow Control
MaxFrame Power
.............
Port Mode
Port>mode 2
Port
Mode
---- ----------2
Link
----
Auto
1Gfdx
Port Status - All
switch:/Port>config
Information
Port Configuration:
===================
Port
State
Mode
---- -------- -----------
------------ -------- --------
Excessive
Link
--------- ----
1
Enabled
Auto
Disabled
9600
Disabled Discard
Down
2
Enabled
Auto
Disabled
9600
Disabled Discard
1Gfdx
3
Enabled
Auto
Disabled
9600
Disabled Discard
Down
..............
Status of Link UP
switch:/Port>conf all up
ports
Port Configuration:
===================
Port
State
Mode
---- -------- ----------2
Port Statistic
Enabled
Flow Control
------------ -------- --------
Auto
Disabled
MaxFrame Power
Excessive
Link
--------- ---9600
Disabled Discard
1Gfdx
switch:/Port>statistic 1
Port 1 Statistics:
Rx Packets:
0
Tx Packets:
Rx Octets:
0
Tx Octets:
0
Rx Unicast:
0
Tx Unicast:
0
...................
174
0
5.4 Security Configuration
Feature
Command Line
Security-Switch Configuration
Security -Switch
Group
>securi swi
Type 'up' to move up one level or '/' to go to root level
Security/Switch>?
Command Groups:
--------------Security Switch Users
: User management
Security Switch Privilege: Privilege level
Security Switch Auth
: Authentication
Security Switch SSH
: Secure Shell
Security Switch HTTPS
: Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket
Layer
Security Switch Access
Security Switch SNMP
Security Switch RMON
User Configuration
: Access management
: Simple Network Management Protocol
: Remote Network Monitoring
Security/Switch>user ?
Available Commands:
Security Switch Users Configuration
Security Switch Users Add <user_name> <password>
<privilege_level>
Security Switch Users Delete <user_name>
Add New User
Syntax:
Security Switch Users Add <user_name> <password>
<privilege_level>
Example: Add New User Name, Password with highest
privilege, Name: Orwell, Password: possword, Privilege: 15
Security/Switch>users add Orwell password 15
Delete the User
Syntax:
Security Switch Users Delete <user_name>
Example: Delete the User, Orwell from User Name
database
Security/Switch>users del Orwell
User Name Database
Security/Switch>users conf
Users Configuration:
====================
User Name
-------------------------------- --------------175
Privilege Level
admin
Orwell
Privilege Level
15
15
Syntax:
Security Switch Privilege Level Group <group_name>
[<cro>] [<crw>] [<sro>] [<srw>]
(cro=Configuration Read-Only, crw=Configuration/Excute
Read/Write, sro=Status/Statistics Read-Only,
srw=Status/Statistics Read/Write)
Example: Set Privilege level of VLAN Group
Security/Switch/Privilege>level group VLANs 10 10 10 10
(cro=10, crw=10, sro=10, srw=10)
Privilege Level
Security/Switch>pri level conf
Configuration Table
Privilege Level Configuration:
==============================
Privilege Current Level: 15
Group Name
Privilege Level
CRO CRW SRO SRW
-------------------------------- --- --- --- --Aggregation
Debug
Diagnostics
Authentication
Method
5
10
5
15
15
15
5
10
5
10
15
10
Syntax:
Security Switch Auth Method [console|telnet|ssh|web]
[none|local|radius|tacacs+] [enable|disable]
Example: Configure Telnet Authentication method to
Radius Enable
Security/Switch>auth method telnet radius en
Authentication
Security/Switch>auth conf
Configuration
Auth Configuration:
===================
Client
-------
Local Authentication Fallback
-----------------------------
console
local
Disabled
telnet
local
Disabled
ssh
local
Disabled
web
SSH
Authentication Method
----------------------
local
Disabled
Syntax:
Security Switch SSH Mode [enable|disable]
Example:
Security/Switch>ssh mode en
Security/Switch>ssh mode dis
HTTPS
Syntax:
Security Switch HTTPS Mode [enable|disable]
Security/Switch>https mode en
176
Security/Switch>https mode dis
Security Switch HTTPS Redirect [enable|disable]
Security/Switch>https mode en (Must enabled HTTPS)
Security/Switch>https redi en
Result:
Security/Switch>https conf
HTTPS Configuration:
====================
HTTPS Mode
: Enabled
HTTPS Redirect Mode : Enabled
Access Management
Syntax:
Security Switch Access Add <access_id> <start_ip_addr>
<end_ip_addr> [web] [snmp
] [telnet]
Example: Limit the IP range from the 192.168.2.1 to
192.168.2.10 can access the web UI.
Security/Switch>access add 1 192.168.2.1 192.168.2.10 web
SNMP System
Configuration
(Mode, Version,
Read /Write
Community)
Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP Mode [enable|disable]
Security Switch SNMP Version [1|2c|3]
Security Switch SNMP Read Community [<community>]
Security Switch SNMP Write Community [<community>]
Example:
Security/Switch>snmp mode en
Security/Switch>snmp ver 2c
Security/Switch/SNMP>read com abc
Security/Switch/SNMP>write com orwell
Result:
SNMP Configuration:
===================
SNMP Mode
SNMP Version
Read Community
Write Community
SNMP Community
: Enabled
: 2c
: abc
: orwell
Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP Community Add <community>
[<ip_addr>] [<ip_mask>]
Security Switch SNMP Community Delete <index>
Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup [<index>]
Example:
Security/Switch>snmp commu add abc
Security/Switch>snmp commu add test 192.168.2.100
255.255.255.0
177
SNMP Trap Server
Enter the SNMP Trap Configuration Group
Setting
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap
Type 'up' to move up one level or '/' to go to root level
Security/Switch/SNMP/Trap>
Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode [enable|disable]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Version [1|2c|3]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Community [<community>]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination [<ip_addr_string>]
Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination [<ipv6_addr>]
Example:
Security/Switch/SNMP/Trap>mode ena
Security/Switch/SNMP/Trap>version 2c
Security/Switch/SNMP/Trap>community public
Security/Switch/SNMP/Trap>destination 192.168.2.100
Result:
Trap Mode
Trap Version
Trap Community
Trap Destination
Trap IPv6 Destination
SNMP Trap Event
Setting
: Enabled
: 2c
: public
: 192.168.2.100
: ::
Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure
[enable|disable]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Link-up [enable|disable]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode [enable|disable]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout [<timeout>]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times [<retries>]
Example:
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap auth fai en
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap link-up en
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap info mode en
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap info time 5
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap info ret times 5
Result:
Trap Authentication Failure : Enabled
Trap Link-up and Link-down
: Enabled
Trap Inform Mode
: Enabled
Trap Inform Timeout (seconds) : 5
Trap Inform Retry Times
:5
SNMPv3 User
Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP User Add <engineid> <user_name>
[MD5|SHA] [<auth_password>] [DES] [<priv_password>]
Example:
Security/Switch/SNMP>user add 800007e5017f000001
orwell
Security/Switch/SNMP>user add 800007e5017f000001 andy
178
md5 andy123
Result:
SNMPv3 Users Table:
Idx Engine ID User Name
Level
Auth Priv
--- --------- -------------------------------- -------------- ---- ---1
Local
default_user
NoAuth, NoPriv None
2
Local
orwell
NoAuth, NoPriv None
3
Local
andy
Auth, NoPriv
MD5 None
Number of entries: 3
RMON
In Security/Switch Group, the system supports 4 types
RMON groups, please follow the RMON Syntax to add the
entries.
Syntax:
Security/Switch>rmon ?
Statistics:
Security Switch RMON Statistics Add <stats_id>
<data_source>
Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete <stats_id>
Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup [<stats_id>]
Histroy:
Security Switch RMON History Add <history_id>
<data_source> [<interval>] [<buckets>]
Security Switch RMON History Delete <history_id>
Security Switch RMON History Lookup [<history_id>]
Alarm:
Security Switch RMON Alarm Add <alarm_id> <interval>
<alarm_vairable> [absolute|delta] <rising_threshold>
<rising_event_index> <falling_threshold>
<falling_event_index> [rising|falling|both]
Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete <alarm_id>
Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup [<alarm_id>]
Event:
Security Switch RMON Event Add <event_id>
[none|log|trap|log_trap] [<community>] [<description>]
Security Switch RMON Event Delete <event_id>
Security Switch RMON Event Lookup [<event_id>]
Security-Network Configuration
Limit Control
Limit Control System
Configuration
Syntax:
Security Network Limit Configuration [<port_list>]
Security Network Limit Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network Limit Aging [enable|disable]
Security Network Limit Agetime [<age_time>]
Example:
Security/Network>limit mode enable
Security/Network>limit agin enable
Security/Network>limit agetim 1000
Result:
179
Port Security Limit Control Configuration:
==========================================
Mode
: Enabled
Aging
: Disabled
Age Period: 3600
Limit Control - Port
Configuration
Syntax:
Security Network Limit Port [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Security Network Limit [<port_list>] [<limit>]
Security Network Limit Action [<port_list>]
[none|trap|shut|trap_shut]
Security Network Limit Reopen [<port_list>]
Example:
Security/Network>limit port 1 enabl
Security/Network>limit 1 5
Security/Network>limit action 1 trap
Network Access Server Configuration (also known as IEEE 802.1X)
Syntax:
NAS System
Mode:
Configuration
Security Network NAS Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network NAS Reauthentication [enable|disable]
Time Settings
Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod [<reauth_period>]
Security Network NAS EapolTimeout [<eapol_timeout>]
Security Network NAS Agetime [<age_time>]
Security Network NAS Holdtime [<hold_time>]
Radius-Assigned
Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS [global|<port_list>]
[enable|disable]
Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN [global|<port_list>]
[enable|disable]
Guest VLAN
Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN [global|<port_list>]
[enable|disable] [<vid>] [<reauth_max>]
[<allow_if_eapol_seen>]
Example:
Guest_VLAN Global Enabled, Guest VLAN ID=100,
Max. Re-Authentication Count = 10,
Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL See = Enable
Security/Network>nas gues glob en 100 10 en
NAS Port
Configuration
Syntax:
Security Network NAS State [<port_list>]
[auto|authorized|unauthorized|single|multi|macbased]
auto= Port-based 802.1X
authorized = Force Authorized
unauthorized = Force Unauthorized
single = Single 802.1X
180
multi= Multi 802.1X
macbased = MAC_Based Authentication
Example:
Security/Network>nas state 2 auto
ACL (Access Control List)
Syntax:
ACL Port
Security Network ACL Action [<port_list>] [permit|deny]
Configuration
[<rate_limiter>] [<port_redirect>] [<mirror>] [<logging>]
[<shutdown>]
Parameters:
<port_list>
: Port list or 'all', default: All ports
permit
: Permit forwarding (default)
deny
: Deny forwarding
<rate_limiter> : Rate limiter number (1-15) or 'disable'
<port_redirect>: Port list for copy of frames or 'disable'
<mirror>
: Mirror of frames: enable|disable
<logging>
: System logging of frames: log|log_disable
<shutdown>
: Shut down ingress port: shut|shut_disable
Example:
Security/Network/ACL>Action 1 permit 10 dis en log shut
Result:
ACL Configuration:
==================
Port Policy Action
---1
Rate Limiter
-----0
Rate L. Port C.
------ -------
------- --------
Permit 10
Mirror
--------
Logging
Shutdown
Counter
-------- -------
Disabled Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
0
Syntax:
Security Network ACL Rate [<rate_limiter_list>]
[<rate_unit>] [<rate>]
Parameters:
<rate_limiter_list>: Rate limiter list (1-16), default: All rate
limiters
<rate_unit> : IP flags: pps|kbps, default: pss
<rate>: Rate in pps (0-100) or kbps (0, 100, 2*100, 3*100, ...,
1000000)
Example: Rate Limiter ID=10, Rate = 300kbps
Security/Network/ACL>rate 10 kbps 300
ACL Policy
Result:
Rate Limiter Rate
------------ ---..........
9
1 PPS
10
300 KBPS
.......
Syntax:
Security Network ACL Policy [<port_list>] [<policy>]
Example:
Security/Network/ACL>policy 1 2
181
Access Control List
Syntax:
Security Network ACL Add [<ace_id>] [<ace_id_next>]
[(port <port_list>)] [(policy <policy> <policy_bitmask>)]
[<tagged>] [<vid>] [<tag_prio>] [<dmac_type>] [(etype
[<etype>] [<smac>] [<dmac>]) |
(arp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<smac>] [<arp_opcode>]
[<arp_flags>]) |
(ip [<sip>] [<dip>] [<protocol>] [<ip_flags>]) |
(icmp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<icmp_type>] [<icmp_code>]
[<ip_flags>]) |
(udp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<sport>] [<dport>] [<ip_flags>]) |
(tcp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<sport>] [<dport>] [<ip_flags>]
[<tcp_flags>])]
[permit|deny] [<rate_limiter>] [<port_redirect>] [<mirror>]
[<logging>][<shutdown>]
Parameters:
<ace_id>
: ACE ID (1-256), default: Next available ID
<ace_id_next> : Next ACE ID (1-256), default: Add ACE
last
port
: Port ACE keyword
<port_list>
: Port list or 'all', default: All ports
policy
: Policy ACE keyword
<policy>
: Policy number (0-255)
<policy_bitmask>: Policy number bitmask (0x0-0xFF)
<tagged>
: Tagged of frames: any|enable|disable
<vid>
: VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any'
<tag_prio>
: VLAN tag priority (0-7) or 'any'
<dmac_type>
: DMAC type:
any|unicast|multicast|broadcast
etype
: Ethernet Type keyword
<etype>
: Ethernet Type: 0x600 - 0xFFFF or 'any'
but excluding 0x800(IPv4) 0x806(ARP) and 0x86DD(IPv6)
<smac>
: Source MAC address ('xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx'
or 'xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx' or 'xxxxxxxxxxxx', x is a hexadecimal
digit) or 'any'
<dmac>
: Destination MAC address
('xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx' or 'xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx' or 'xxxxxxxxxxxx', x
is a hexadecimal digit) or 'any'
arp
: ARP keyword
<sip>
: Source IP address (a.b.c.d/n) or 'any'
<dip>
: Destination IP address (a.b.c.d/n) or 'any'
<arp_opcode>
: ARP operation code: any|arp|rarp|other
<arp_flags>
: ARP flags: request|smac|tmac|len|ip|ether
[0|1|any]
ip
: IP keyword
<protocol>
: IP protocol number (0-255) or 'any'
<ip_flags>
: IP flags: ttl|options|fragment [0|1|any]
icmp
: ICMP keyword
<icmp_type>
: ICMP type number (0-255) or 'any'
<icmp_code>
: ICMP code number (0-255) or 'any'
udp
: UDP keyword
<sport>
: Source UDP/TCP port range (0-65535) or
'any'
<dport>
: Destination UDP/TCP port range
(0-65535) or 'any'
182
tcp
: TCP keyword
<tcp_flags>
: TCP flags: fin|syn|rst|psh|ack|urg [0|1|any]
permit
: Permit forwarding (default)
deny
: Deny forwarding
<rate_limiter> : Rate limiter number (1-15) or 'disable'
<port_redirect> : Port list for copy of frames or 'disable'
<mirror>
: Mirror of frames: enable|disable
<logging>
: System logging of frames:
log|log_disable
<shutdown>
: Shut down ingress port:
shut|shut_disable
Example:
Add one ACE:
Security/Network/ACL>add 2 port 6-10 policy 3 8 ip
ACE ID 2 added last
Edit one ACE:
Security/Network/ACL>add 1 port 1-5 policy 2 8 any
ACE ID 1 modified last
Result:
ID
--
Type
Port
Policy
Frame Action Rate L.
Port C.
Mirror
Counter
------- -------- -------- ----- ------ -------- -------- -------- -------
1
User
1-5
2 /0x8 Any
2
User
6-10
3 /0x8 IP
Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled
Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled
0
0
DHCP
DHCP Snooping
Syntax:
Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode [<port_list>]
[trusted|untrusted]
Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics [<port_list>]
[clear]
Example:
Security/Network>dhcp snooping mode en
Security/Network>dhcp snooping port mode 1 tru (Port
1)
Security/Network>dhcp snooping port mode 1-10 tru
(Port 1-10)
DHCP Relay
Syntax:
Security Network DHCP Relay Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network DHCP Relay Server [<ip_addr>]
Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode
[enable|disable]
Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy
[replace|keep|drop]
Example:
Security/Network>dhcp relay server 192.168.2.100
Security/Network>dhcp relay mode en
(Assign one Server IP before enable the Relay mode)
Security/Network>dhcp rel info mode en
Security/Network>dhcp rel info policy keep
183
IP Source Guard
IP Source Guard
Configuration
Syntax:
Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration
Security Network IP Source Guard Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode [<port_list>]
[enable|disable]
Security Network IP Source Guard limit [<port_list>]
[<dynamic_entry_limit>|unlimited]
Security Network IP Source Guard Entry [<port_list>]
add|delete <vid> <allowed_ip> <allowed_mac>
Security Network IP Source Guard Status [<port_list>]
Security Network IP Source Guard Translation
Example:
Security/Network>ip source guard mode en
Security/Network>ip source guard port mode 1-10 en (Port
1-10)
Security/Network>ip source guard limit 1-10 2 (limit 2 MAC
Address)
IP Source Guard
Static Table
Syntax:
Security Network IP Source Guard Entry [<port_list>]
add|delete <vid> <allowed_ip> <allowed_mac>
Example:
Security/Network>ip source guard entry 5 add 2
192.168.2.101 001122334455
Result:
IP Source Guard Entry Table:
Type
Port VLAN IP Address
MAC Address
------- ---- ---- --------------- ----------------Static
1
1 192.168.2.10
11-22-33-44-55-66
Static
5
2 192.168.2.101
00-0b-16-21-2c-37
ARP Inspection
ARP Inspection
Syntax:
Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration
Security Network ARP Inspection Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode [<port_list>]
[enable|disable]
Security Network ARP Inspection Entry [<port_list>]
add|delete <vid> <allowed_mac> <allowed_ip>
Security Network ARP Inspection Status [<port_list>]
Security Network ARP Inspection Translation
Example:
Security/Network>arp inspection mode en
Security/Network>arp inspection port mode 1-10 en
Security/Network>arp inspection entry 1 add 10
112233445566 192.168.2.10
Security/Network>arp inspection status
ARP Inspection Entry Table:
184
Type Port VLAN MAC Address
------- ----------------------Static
1
10
0b-16-21-2c-37-42
IP Address
------------192.168.2.10
Security-AAA Configuration
Common Server
Configuration
RADIUS
Authentication
Server
RADIUS Accounting
Server
Syntax:
Security AAA Timeout [<timeout>]
Security AAA Deadtime [<dead_time>]
Syntax:
Security AAA RADIUS [<server_index>] [enable|disable]
[<ip_addr_string>] [<secret>] [<server_port>]
Example:
Security>aaa radi 1 en 192.168.2.200 password 1812
Syntax:
Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS [<server_index>]
[enable|disable] [<ip_addr_string>] [<secret>]
[<server_port>]
Example:
Security>aaa ACCT_radi 1 en 192.168.2.200 password 1813
TACACS+
Authentication
Server
AAA Configuration
Syntax:
Security AAA TACACS+ [<server_index>] [enable|disable]
[<ip_addr_string>] [<secret>] [<server_port>]
Example:
Security>aaa tacacs+ 1 en 192.168.2.200 password 49
Security>aaa con
AAA Configuration:
==================
Server Timeout
: 15 seconds
Server Dead Time : 300 seconds
RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration:
===========================================
Server
Mode
IP Address
------ -------- ---------------
Secret
------------------------------
192.168.2.200
Port
-----
1
Enabled
2
Disabled
********
1812
1812
3
Disabled
1812
4
Disabled
1812
5
Disabled
1812
RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration:
=======================================
Server
Mode
IP Address
------ -------- ---------------
Secret
------------------------------
192.168.2.200
1
Enabled
2
Disabled
1813
3
Disabled
1813
4
Disabled
1813
185
********
Port
----1813
5
Disabled
1813
TACACS+ Authentication Server Configuration:
============================================
Server
Mode
IP Address
------ -------- ---------------
Secret
------------------------------
192.168.2.200
Port
-----
1
Enabled
2
Disabled
********
49
49
3
Disabled
49
4
Disabled
49
5
Disabled
49
Security>
5.5 Aggregation Configuration
Feature
Command Line
Static Aggregation Configuration
Aggregation Group
Configuration
Syntax:
Aggr Add <port_list> [<aggr_id>]
Example: Add port 5-8 to Group 1
>aggr add 5-8 1
>aggr del 1
Hash Code
Contributors
(Delete the group 1)
Syntax:
Aggr Mode [smac|dmac|ip|port] [enable|disable]
smac = Source MAC Address
dmac = Destination MAC Address
ip = IP Address
port = TCP/UDP Port Number
Example: Only the Source MAC Hash is enabled. The rest
mode are disabled.
>agg mode smac en
>agg mode dmac dis
>agg mode ip dis
>agg mode port dis
LACP
LACP Port
Configuration
Syntax:
LACP Configuration [<port_list>]
LACP Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
LACP Key [<port_list>] [<key>]
LACP Role [<port_list>] [active|passive]
LACP Status [<port_list>]
LACP Statistics [<port_list>] [clear]
Example: Configure port 5-8 to a LACP group
>lacp mode 5-8 en (Mode = Enable)
186
>lacp key 5-8 100
>lacp role 5-8 act
(Key = 100)
(Role = Enable)
5.6 Loop Protection
Feature
Command Line
General Settings
Enable Loop
Protection
Syntax:
Loop Protect Mode [enable|disable]
Loop Protect Transmit [<transmit-time>]
Loop Protect Shutdown [<shutdown-time>]
Example:
>loop protect mode en
Transmission Time
>loop protect trans 10
(10 seconds)
Shutdown Time
>loop protect shut 200
(200 seconds)
Port Configuration
Loop Protection Port Configuration
Syntax:
Loop Protect Port Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Loop Protect Port Action [<port_list>]
[shutdown|shut_log|log]
Loop Protect Port Transmit [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example:
Loop/Protect>port mode 1 en
Loop/Protect>port action 1 shut_log (Shutdown Port and
Log)
Loop/Protect>port transmit 1 en
5.7 Spanning Tree
Feature
Command Line
Bridge Configuration
Protocol Version
Syntax:
STP Version [<stp_version>]
Parameters:
<stp_version>: mstp|rstp|stp
Example:
STP>ver rstp
Bridge Priority
Syntax:
STP Msti Priority [<msti>] [<priority>]
187
Example:
STP>msti pri
MSTI# Bridge Priority
----- --------------CIST 32768
STP>msti pri 4096
Forward Delay
(The available priority parameter includes: 0, 4096, 8192,
12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960,
45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440)
Syntax:
STP FwdDelay [<delay>]
(Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds)
Max. Age
Maximum Hop
Count
Syntax:
STP MaxAge [<max_age>]
(Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds, and MaxAge must
be <= (FwdDelay-1)*2.)
Syntax:
STP MaxHops [<maxhops>]
(Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops)
Transmit Hold Count
Syntax:
STP Txhold [<holdcount>]
(Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU's per second.)
Advanced Setting
Syntax:
STP bpduFilter [enable|disable]
STP bpduGuard [enable|disable]
STP recovery [<timeout>]
(After recovery timeout time is set, the recovery is enabled
automatically.)
MSTI Mapping
MSTI/VLAN Mapping
Syntax:
STP Msti Add <msti> <vid-range>
Example:
STP>mst add 1 100
Add VLAN 100 to MSTI1
STP>mst map
MSTI VLANs mapped to MSTI
---- -------------------MSTI1 100
MSTI2 No VLANs mapped
MSTI3 No VLANs mapped
MSTI4 No VLANs mapped
MSTI5 No VLANs mapped
MSTI6 No VLANs mapped
MSTI7 No VLANs mapped
Port Setting
STP Port Mode
Syntax:
188
STP Port Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port Edge [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port AutoEdge [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port P2P [<port_list>] [enable|disable|auto]
STP Port RestrictedRole [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port RestrictedTcn [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port bpduGuard [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port Statistics [<port_list>] [clear]
Example:
STP>port mode 1-24 dis (Disable STP on port 1-24)
STP>port edge 1-24 en (Enable Edge port on port 1-24)
STP>port autoedge 1-24 en (Enable Auto Edge on P1-24)
STP>port p2p 1-24 en (Enable P2P mode on P1-24)
STP>port p2p 1-24 auto (Enable Automatic P2P detection)
STP>port bpdu 1-24 en (Enable BPDUGuard on P1-24)
Port Path Cost
Syntax:
STP Msti Port Cost [<msti>] [<port_list>] [<path_cost>]
Parameters:
<msti>
: STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)
<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.
<path_cost>: STP port path cost (1-200000000) or 'auto'
Example: Configure CIST 0 Port Path Cost
STP>msti port cost 0 all auto (Path cost = auto)
STP>msti port cost 0 all 100000 (Path cost = 100000)
Port Priority
Syntax:
STP Msti Port Priority [<msti>] [<port_list>] [<priority>]
Parameters:
<msti>
: STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)
<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.
<priority> : STP port priority (0/16/32/48/.../224/240)
Example: Configure CIST 0 Port Priority
STP Msti Port Priority [<msti>] [<port_list>] [<priority>]
STP>msti port priority 0 5 240 (Port 5 Priority = 240)
STP>msti port priority 0 all 128 (All Ports' priority = 128)
Example: Configure MSTI 1 Port Priority
STP>msti port priority 1 5 240 (MSTI1 port 5 priority=240)
5.8 MVR
Feature
Command Line
MVR Configuration
MVR Mode
Syntax:
MVR Mode [enable|disable]
189
MVR - VLAN
Interface Setting
Syntax:
MVR VLAN Setup [<mvid>] [add|del|upd] [(Name
<mvr_name>)]
Example: MVR VLAN 2, MVR Name = Source2
MVR>vlan setup 2 add Name Source2
MVR - Port Role
Syntax:
MVR VLAN Port [<vid>|<mvr_name>] [<port_list>]
[source|receiver|inactive]
Example: Port 2 = Source Port, Port 6-7 = Receiver Port
MVR>vlan port 2 2 source
MVR>vlan port 2 6-7 rec
Immediately Leave
MVR Configuration
Syntax:
MVR Immediate Leave [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example:
MVR>immedi leave 1-10 en
MVR>conf (View the settings of above configuration)
MVR Configuration:
==================
MVR Mode: Enabled
MVR Interface Setting
VID
Name
Mode
---- -------------------------------- ---------- -------- -------2
Source2
Dynamic
Tagging
Tagged
[Port Setting of Source2(VID-2)]
Source Port : 2
Receiver Port: 6,7
Inactive Port: 1,3-5,8-26
[Channel Setting of Source2(VID-2)]
<Empty Channel Table>
MVR Immediate Leave Setting
Port
Immediate Leave
---- --------------1
Enabled
2
Enabled
3
Enabled
4
Enabled
5
Enabled
6
Enabled
7
Enabled
8
Enabled
9
Enabled
10
Enabled
11
Disabled
12
Disabled
5.9 IPMC
Feature
Command Line
IGMP Snooping Configuration
IGMP Snooping
Syntax:
Enable
IPMC Mode [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]
190
Priority
LLQI
----0
5
Example:
IPMC>mode igmp en
Unregistered
Syntax:
IPMCv4 Flooding
IPMC Flooding [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]
Enabled
Example:
IPMC>flood igmp en
IGMP SSM Range
Syntax:
(Source-Specific
IPMC SSM [mld|igmp] [(Range <prefix> <mask_len>)]
Multicast)
Example:
IPMC>ssm igmp range 239.0.0.0 8
(Range from 239.0.0.0, mask length=8)
Leave Proxy Enable
Syntax:
IPMC Leave Proxy [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]
Example:
Proxy Enable
IPMC>leave proxy igmp en
(Enable)
IPMC>leave proxy igmp dis
(Disable)
Syntax:
IPMC Proxy [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]
Example:
IPMC>proxy igmp en
(Enable)
IPMC>proxy igmp dis
(Disable)
Port Related
Syntax:
Configuration
IPMC Router [mld|igmp] [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
IPMC Fastleave [mld|igmp] [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
IPMC Throttling [mld|igmp] [<port_list>]
[limit_group_number]
Example:
(Router Port, Fast
Leave, Throttling)
IPMC>router igmp 25-26 en (Port 25-26 are router ports)
IPMC>Fast igmp 1-24 en (Enable IGMP Fast Leave on P1-24)
IPMC>thro igmp 1-2 5 (Throtting of Port 1, 2 is 5
groups.)
VLAN Configuration
Syntax:
IPMC State [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [enable|disable]
IPMC Querier [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [enable|disable]
IPMC Compatibility [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [auto|v1|v2|v3]
IPMC Parameter RV [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_rv]
IPMC Parameter QI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_qi]
IPMC Parameter QRI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_qri]
IPMC Parameter LLQI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_llqi]
IPMC Parameter URI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_uri]
Example:
IPMC>state igmp 2 en (Enable IGMP Snooping on VLAN
2)
191
IPMC>quer igmp 2 en (Enable IGMP Querier on VLAN 2)
IPMC>compa igmp 2 v2 (Enable IGMPv2 on VLAN 2)
MLD Snooping
MLD Snooping
Note: The MLD Snooping is applied to IPv6 Multicast. The
commands are the same as above IGMP Snooping (IPv4)
Commands. Just chooses mld instead of igmp when seeing
[mld|igmp] in the syntax. The IP Address should be IPv6
format for sure.
5.10 LLDP Configuration
Feature
Command Line
LLDP Parameters
LLDP Timers
Syntax:
LLDP Interval [<interval>]
LLDP Hold [<hold>]
LLDP Delay [<delay>]
LLDP Reinit [<reinit>]
Example:
LLDP>interval 30
LLDP>hold 4
LLDP>delay 2
LLDP>reini 2
LLDP Mode
Syntax:
LLDP Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable|rx|tx]
(rx=RX Only, tx=TX Only)
Example: Enable LLDP on Ports
LLDP>mode 1-10 en (Port 1-10 are enabled)
LLDP>mode 1-26 en (Port 1-26 are enabled)
CDP aware
Syntax:
LLDP cdp_aware [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example: Enable CDP on Port 1-5
LLDP>cdp_a 1-5 en (CDP on Port 1-5 are enabled)
LLDP Optional_TLV
Parameters
Syntax:
LLDP optional_TLV [<port_list>]
[port_descr|sys_name|sys_descr|sys_capa|mgmt_addr]
[enable|disable]
Example:
LLDP>option 1-3 port en
LLDP>option 1-3 sys_name en
LLDP>option 1-3 sys_desc en
LLDP>option 1-3 sys_capa en
LLDP>option 1-3 mgmt_add en
192
5.11 sFlow Configuration
Feature
Command Line
sFlow Configuration
Receiver
Configuration
Syntax:
sFlow Receiver [release] [<timeout>] [<ip_addr_host>]
[<udp_port>] [<datagram_size>]
Example:
sFlow>receiver 10 192.168.2.100 6343 1400
Result:
Receiver Configuration:
=======================
Receiver Release
Port Configuration
Owner
: <none>
Receiver
: 192.168.2.100
UDP Port
: 6343
Max. Datagram: 1400 bytes
Time left
: 0 seconds
sFlow>receiver
Syntax:
sFlow Receiver [release] [<timeout>] [<ip_addr_host>]
[<udp_port>] [<datagram_size>]
sFlow FlowSampler [<port_list>] [<sampling_rate>]
[<max_hdr_size>]
sFlow CounterPoller [<port_list>] [<interval>]
sFlow Statistics Receiver [clear]
sFlow Statistics Samplers [<port_list>] [clear]
Example:
sFlow>flow 1-2 10 128 (Enable FlowSample on port 1-2,
rate=10, max. size=128)
sFlow>coun 1-2 5
set interval to 5)
(Enable CounterPoller of port 1-2, and
sFlow>statistic sample 1-2
Per-Port Statistics:
====================
Port Rx Flow Samples Tx Flow Samples Counter Samples
---- --------------- --------------- --------------1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
193
5.12 MAC Address Table Configuration
Feature
Command Line
MAC Address Table Configuration
Aging Time
Syntax:
Configuration
MAC Agetime [<age_time>]
Parameters:
<age_time>: MAC address age time (0,10-1000000)
0=disable
Example:
MAC>age 100 (change aging time to 100 seconds, the
aging time range is 10-1000000)
MAC>age 0 (0 = Disable Aging time)
MAC Learning
Syntax:
Configuration
MAC Learning [<port_list>] [auto|disable|secure]
Example:
MAC>lear 1-8 sec
MAC>lear 9-12 dis
MAC>learn 1-12 auto
Static MAC Table
Syntax:
MAC Add <mac_addr> <port_list> [<vid>]
Example:
MAC>add 0b16212c3742 1-5 1 (This type will be changed
to hexadecimal automatically.)
MAC>add 0b-16-21-2c-37-42 1-10 1 (This type is
hexadecimal, it will not be changed.)
Result:
Non-volatile static:
VID MAC Address
Ports
--- ----------------- ----1
00-10-15-02-25-2a 1-5
1
0b-16-21-2c-37-42 1-10
5.13 VLAN Configuration
Feature
Command Line
VLAN Configuration
VLAN Membership
Syntax:
VLAN Add <vid>|<name> [<ports_list>]
VLAN Name Add <name> <vid>
194
Example:
VLAN>add 3 5-8 (Add port 5-8 to VLAN 3)
VLAN>name add vlan3 3 (vlan3 is the name of VLAN 3)
Port Configuration
Syntax:
VLAN FrameType [<port_list>] [all|tagged|untagged]
VLAN IngressFilter [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
VLAN tx_tag [<port_list>] [untag_pvid|untag_all|tag_all]
VLAN PortType [<port_list>]
[unaware|c-port|s-port|s-custom-port]
Example:
VLAN>framety 1-3 all
VLAN>ingr 1-3 en
VLAN>tx_t 1-3 untag_pvid
VLAN>portty 1-3 un
5.14 Private VLAN Configuration
Feature
Command Line
PVLAN Configuration
PVLAN
Configuration
Syntax:
PVLAN Configuration [<port_list>]
PVLAN Add <pvlan_id> [<port_list>]
PVLAN Delete <pvlan_id>
PVLAN Lookup [<pvlan_id>]
PVLAN Isolate [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example:
PVLAN>add 10 9-12
PVLAN>add 10 1-2
PVLAN>add 20 1-2
PVLAN>add 20 13-18
PVLAN>iso 9-18 en
(Enable Isolated Ports)
Result:
PVLAN ID Ports
-------- ----1
1-8,17-26
10
1,2
20
13-18
5.15 VCL Configuration
Feature
Command Line
MAC-based VLAN Configuration
MAC-based VLAN
Configuration
Syntax:
VCL Macvlan Add <mac_addr> <vid> [<port_list>]
Example:
VCL/Macvlan>add 001122334455 10 1-4
195
Result:
VCL/Macvlan>conf
MAC Address
VID Ports
----------------- ---- ----00-0b-16-21-2c-37 10
1-4
Protocol-based VLAN Configuration
Protocol to Group
Syntax:
VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Eth2
<ether_type>|arp|ip|ipx|at <group_id>
Example:
VCL/ProtoVlan>protocol add Eth2 0x0808 E4
Group to VLAN
Syntax:
VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Add [<port_list>] <group_id> <vid>
Example:
VCL/ProtoVlan>vlan add 1-8 E4 10
Protocol VLAN
Configuration
Result:
VCL/ProtoVlan>conf
Protocol Type Protocol (Value)
------------- ------------------------ -------EthernetII
ETYPE:0x808
LLC_Other
DSAP:0xff; SSAP:0xff
LLC_SNAP
OUI-00:e0:2b; PID:0x1
EthernetII
ETYPE:0x800
Group ID
VID
---------------- ---- ----E4
10
E1
10
Group ID
E4
L3
S2
E1
Ports
1-8
5-8
IP Subnet-based VLAN Configuration
IP Subnet-based
VLAN Configuration
Syntax:
VCL IPVlan Add [<vce_id>] <ip_addr_mask> <vid>
[<port_list>]
Parameters:
<vce_id>
: Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry
<ip_addr_mask>: Source IP address and mask (Format:
a.b.c.d/n).
<vid>
: VLAN ID (1-4095)
<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports
Example:
VCL/IPVlan>add 1 192.168.10.0/24 10 1-10
Result:
VCE ID IP Address
Mask Length VID
------ --------------- ----------- ---- ----1
192.168.10.0
24
10
196
Ports
1-10
5.16 Voice VLAN Configuration
Feature
Command Line
Voice VLAN Configuration
Voice VLAN
Configuration
Syntax:
Voice VLAN Mode [enable|disable]
Voice VLAN ID [<vid>]
Voice VLAN Agetime [<age_time>]
Voice VLAN Traffic Class [<class>]
Example:
Voice>vlan mode en
Voice>vlan id 100
Voice>vlan age 86400
Voice>vlan traff class 7
Result:
Voice VLAN Configuration:
=========================
Voice VLAN Mode
: Enabled
Voice VLAN VLAN ID
: 100
Voice VLAN Age Time(seconds) : 86400
Voice VLAN Traffic Class
:7
Port Configuration
Syntax:
Voice VLAN Port Mode [<port_list>] [disable|auto|force]
Voice VLAN Security [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol [<port_list>] [oui|lldp|both]
Example:
Voice/VLAN>port mode 1-4 auto
Voice/VLAN>security 1-4 en
Voice/VLAN>disco pro 1-4 both
Result:
Voice VLAN Port Configuration:
==============================
Port Mode
Security Discovery Protocol
---- -------- -------- -----------------1
Auto
Enabled
Both
2
Auto
Enabled
Both
3
Auto
Enabled
Both
4
Auto
Enabled
Both
OUI Configuration
Syntax:
Voice VLAN OUI Add <oui_addr> [<description>]
Voice VLAN OUI Delete <oui_addr>
Voice VLAN OUI Clear
Voice VLAN OUI Lookup [<oui_addr>]
Example:
Voice/VLAN>oui add 00-12-08 hello
Result:
Voice/VLAN>oui lookup
Voice VLAN OUI Table:
=====================
Telephony OUI Description
------------- ----------00-01-E3
Siemens AG phones
197
00-03-6B
00-0F-E2
00-60-B9
00-D0-1E
00-E0-75
00-E0-BB
00-12-77
00-12-08
Cisco phones
H3C phones
Philips and NEC AG phones
Pingtel phones
Polycom phones
3Com phones
e10
hello
5.17 QoS Configuration
Feature
Command Line
QoS Configuration
Port
Classification
Syntax:
QoS Port Classification Class [<port_list>] [<class>]
QoS Port Classification DPL [<port_list>] [<dpl>]
QoS Port Classification PCP [<port_list>] [<pcp>]
QoS Port Classification DEI [<port_list>] [<dei>]
QoS Port Classification Tag [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
QoS Port Classification Map [<port_list>] [<pcp_list>]
[<dei_list>] [<class>] [<dpl>]
QoS Port Classification DSCP [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Range of the Value:
<class>: QoS class (0-7)
<dpl>: Drop Precedence Level (0-1)
<pcp>: Priority Code Point (0-7)
<dei>: Drop Eligible Indicator (0-1)
Example:
QoS/Port/Classification>clas 1-2 7
QoS/Port/Classification>dpl 1-2 1
QoS/Port/Classification>pcp 1-2 7
QoS/Port/Classification>dei 1-2 1
QoS/Port/Classification>tag 1-2 en
QoS/Port/Classification>dscp 1-2 en
QoS Ingress Port
Tag
Syntax:
QoS Port Classification Map [<port_list>] [<pcp_list>]
[<dei_list>] [<class>] [<dpl>]
Classification
Port Policing
Syntax:
QoS Port Policer Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
QoS Port Policer Rate [<port_list>] [<rate>]
QoS Port Policer Unit [<port_list>] [kbps|fps]
QoS Port Policer FlowControl [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
<rate>
: Rate in kbps or fps (100-3300000)
Example:
QoS/Port/Policer>mode 1-2 en
QoS/Port/Policer>rate 1-2 300
QoS/Port/Policer>unit 1-2 kbps
QoS/Port/Policer>flow 1-2 en
198
Port Scheduler
Syntax:
Syntax:
QoS Port Scheduler Mode [<port_list>] [strict|weighted]
Example:
QoS/Port/Scheduler>mode 1-2 stric (Strict Priority)
QoS/Port/Scheduler>mode 1-2 wei (Weighted)
QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers
QoS/Port/Scheduler>wei 1-2 1 30 (Port 1-2, Q1=30)
QoS/Port/Scheduler>wei 1-2 2 30 (Port 1-2, Q2=30)
Port Shaping
Syntax:
Port Shaper:
QoS Port Shaper Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
QoS Port Shaper Rate [<port_list>] [<bit_rate>]
Queue Shaper:
QoS Port QueueShaper Mode [<port_list>] [<queue_list>]
[enable|disable]
QoS Port QueueShaper Rate [<port_list>] [<queue_list>]
[<bit_rate>]
QoS Port QueueShaper Excess [<port_list>] [<queue_list>]
[enable|disable]
Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports
<bit_rate> : Rate in kilo bits per second (100-3300000)
Example:
QoS/Port/Shaper>rate 1-2 1000
QoS/Port/QueueShaper>mode 1-2 all en (Queue Shaper)
QoS/Port/QueueShaper>rate 1-2 all 600 (Queue Shaper)
DSCP
Syntax:
Configuration
QoS Port DSCP Translation [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
QoS Port DSCP Classification [<port_list>]
199
[none|zero|selected|all]
QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark [<port_list>]
[disable|enable|remap_dp_unaware|remap_dp_aware]
Note: DSCP is an advanced QoS setting, please follow the DSCP
table of upper access/core switch to configure the table. The
table of the whole network must be unified.
Storm Configuration
Strom Control
Syntax:
QoS Storm Unicast [enable|disable] [<packet_rate>]
QoS Storm Multicast [enable|disable] [<packet_rate>]
QoS Storm Broadcast [enable|disable] [<packet_rate>]
<packet_rate>: Rate in fps (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
1k, 2k, 4k, 8k, 16k, 32k, 64k, 128k, 256k, 512k, 1024k, 2048k,
4096k, 8192k, 16384k, 32768k)
Example:
QoS/Storm>unic en 32768k
QoS/Storm>multi en 4096k
QoS/Storm>broad en 4k
5.18 Mirroring Configuration
Feature
Command Line
Mirroring Configuration
Mirror
Configuration
Syntax:
Mirror Port [<port>|disable]
Mirror Mode [<port_cpu_list>] [enable|disable|rx|tx]
Example:
Mirror>port 5
Mirror>mode 6-8 en
Result:
Mirror Configuration:
=====================
Mirror Port: 5
Port Mode
---- -------1
Disabled
2
Disabled
3
Disabled
4
Disabled
5
Disabled
6
Enabled
7
Enabled
8
Enabled
200
5.19 UPnP Configuration
Feature
Command Line
UPnP Configuration
UPnp Configuration
Syntax:
UPnP Configuration
UPnP Mode [enable|disable]
UPnP TTL [<ttl>]
UPnP AdvertisingDuration [<duration>]
Example:
UPnP>mode en
UPnP>ttl 5 (Default=4)
UPnP>adver 200 (Default=100)
Result:
UPnP Configuration:
===================
UPnP Mode : Enabled
UPnP TTL
:5
UPnP Advertising Duration : 200
5.20 Diagnostic Commands
Feature
Command Line
Ping
Ping Test
Syntax:
IP Ping <ip_addr_string> [(Length <ping_length>)] [(Count
<ping_count>)] [(Interval <ping_interval>)]
Parameters:
<ip_addr_string>: IPv4 host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name
string
length
: PING Length keyword
<ping_length> : Ping ICMP data length (2-1452; Default
is 56), excluding MAC,
IP and ICMP headers
count
: PING Count keyword
<ping_count>
: Transmit ECHO_REQUEST packet count
(1-60; Default is 5)
interval
: PING Interval keyword
<ping_interval> : Ping interval (0-30; Default is 0)
Example: Ping IP 192.168.2.100
IP>ping 192.168.2.100
PING server 192.168.2.100, 56 bytes of data.
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=0, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms
Sent 5 packets, received 5 OK, 0 bad
IPv6 Ping Test
Syntax:
IP IPv6 Ping6 <ipv6_addr> [(Length <ping_length>)]
201
[(Count <ping_count>)] [(Interval <ping_interval>)]
Example:
switch:/IP>ipv6 ping6 2001:DB8::250:8bff:fee8:f800
VeriPHY
Syntax:
Port VeriPHY [<port_list>]
Example:
Port>veriphy 24
Starting VeriPHY, please wait
Port
-----
Pair A
Length
------- ------- -------
24
OK
Pair B
Length
------- ------- -------
0
OK
0
Pair C
Length
Pair D
Length
------- -----OK
0
OK
0
5.21 Maintenance Commands
Feature
Command Line
Maintenance Commands
Restart Device
Syntax:
System Reboot
Example:
System>reb
System will reboot in a few seconds
Factory Defaults
Syntax:
System Restore Default [keep_ip]
Example:
Software/Firmware
(Firmware Version,
Firmware Swapping,
Firmware Update)
Syntax:
Firmware Information
Firmware Swap
Firmware Load <ip_addr_string> <file_name>
Parameters of Firmware Load:
<ip_addr_string>: IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name
string
<file_name>
: Firmware file name
Example:
Firmware Swapping
Firmware>sw
... Erase from 0x40fd0000-0x40fdffff: .
... Program from 0x87ff0000-0x88000000 to
0x40fd0000: .
... Program from 0x87ff000a-0x87ff000c to 0x40fd000a: .
Alternate image activated, now rebooting.
Firmware Update
Firmware>load 192.168.2.100 SMBStaX.dat
Downloaded "SMBStaX.dat", 3415213 bytes
Master initiated software updating starting
Waiting for firmware update to complete
Starting flash update - do not power off device!
202
Erasing image...
Programming image...
Note 1:
The switch process the firmware upgrading through TFTP
protocol. When running firmware upgrading, please open
the TFTP tool as TFTP server for the switch.
For example: TFTPd32 is a freeware TFTP server, you can
download it from the internet. Browse the directory of the
firmware file and select correct server interface.
If you failed to upload file, remember to shut down the
firewall of your computer. The process may be terminated
by your firewall.
Note 2: While firmware uploading process is started,
please don't shutdown the switch!
203
6. Web Configuration - Monitor, Diagnostic, Maintenance
6.1 Monitor
6.1.1 Monitor / System
6.1.1.1 Monitor / System / Information
The switch system information is provided here.
Contact
The system contact configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Contact.
Name
The system name configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Name.
Location
The system location configured in Configuration | System | Information | System
Location.
MAC Address
The MAC Address of this switch.
Chip ID
The Chip ID of this switch.
System Date
The current (GMT) system time and date. The system time is obtained through the
configured SNTP Server, if any.
199
System Uptime
The period of time the device has been operational.
Software Version
The software version of this switch.
Software Date
The date of the switch software was produced.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.
6.1.1.2 CPU Load
This page displays the CPU load, using an SVG graph.
The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms, 1sec and 10 seconds intervals.
The last 120 samples are graphed, and the last numbers are displayed as text as well.
In order to display the SVG graph, your browser must support the SVG format. Consult
the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support. Specifically, at the time of
writing, Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG.
Buttons:
Auto-refresh: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
205
6.1.1.3 System Log Information
The switch system log information can be found here.
ID
The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.
Level
The level of the system log entry. The following level types are supported:
Info: Information level of the system log.
Warning: Warning level of the system log.
Error: Error level of the system log.
All: All levels.
206
Time
t system lo
og entry.
The time of the
M
Message
The message of the syste
em log entryy.
B
Buttons
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
R
Refresh: Upd
dates the system log en
ntries, startin
ng from the current enttry ID.
C
Clear: Flushe
es all system log entries..
|<
<<: Updates the system log entries, starting fro
om the first available
a
en try ID.
<<: Updates the
t system log entries, e
ending at th
he last entry
y currently d
displayed.
t system log entries, sstarting from
m the last entry currenttly displayed
d.
>>: Updates the
D.
>>|: Updates the system log entries, ending at the last available entry ID
D
Log
6.1.1.4 System / Detailed
g
The switch syystem detailed log inforrmation is provided here.
ID
D
The ID (>= 1) of the syste
em log entryy.
M
Message
The detailed message of the system log entry.
207
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Upd
dates the system log en
ntry to the cu
urrent entry
y ID.
/<
<<: Updates the system log entry to
o the first av
vailable entrry ID.
<<: Updates the
t system log entry to the previou
us available entry ID.
>>: Updates the
t system log entry to the next av
vailable entry ID.
>>/: Updates the system log entry to
o the last ava
ailable entry
y ID.
M
/ Po
ort State
6.1.2 Monitor
6.1.2.1 Port State
This page pro
ovides an ov
verview of th
he current switch port states.
s
The port stattes are illustrrated as folllows:
R
RJ45 ports
S
SFP ports
S
State
Disabled
wn
Dow
Link
L
B
Buttons
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o refresh the
e page auto
omatically. A
Automatic re
efresh
o
occurs at regular intervals.
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page; a
any changess made locally will be un
ndone.
208
6.1.2.2 Traffic Ove
erview
This page pro
ovides an ov
verview of g
general trafffic statistics for
f all switch
h ports.
d counters are:
a
The displayed
P
Port
The logical port for the settings
s
conttained in the same row.
P
Packets
The number of received and transm itted packetts per port.
B
Bytes
The number of received and transm itted bytes per
p port.
E
Errors
eceived in errror and the
e number of incompletee transmissio
ons
The number of frames re
p
per port.
D
Drops
The number of frames discarded due
e to ingress or egress co
ongestion.
Filtered
ered by the forwarding
f
process.
p
The number of received frames filte
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
C
Clear: Clearss the counters for all po rts.
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
209
6.1.2.3 QoS Statis
stics
This page pro
ovides statistics for the d
different qu
ueues for all switch portts.
d counters are:
a
The displayed
P
Port
The logical port for the settings
s
conttained in the same row.
Q
Qn
There are 8 QoS
Q queues per port. Q0
0 is the lowe
est priority queue.
q
R
Rx/Tx
The number of received and transm itted packetts per queue
e.
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
C
Clear: Clearss the counters for all po rts.
A
Auto-refresh
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
: Check this box to
in
ntervals.
6.1.2.4 QCL Status
s
This page sho
ows the QCL
L status by d
different QCL users. Each
h row descriibes the QCE
E that
iss defined. It is a conflict if a specificc QCE is not applied to the hardwarre due to
210
hardware lim
mitations. Th
he maximum
m number off QCEs is 256
6 on each sw
witch.
U
User
In
ndicates the QCL user.
Q
QCE#
In
ndicates the index of QC
CE.
Frame Type
ndicates the type of fram
me to look ffor incoming
g frames. Po
ossible framee types are:
In
A
Any: The QC
CE will match
h all frame ttype.
E
Ethernet: On
nly Ethernett frames (wi th Ether Typ
pe 0x600-0xF
FFFF) are all owed.
LLC: Only (LLLC) frames are allowed.
S
SNAP: Only (SNAP)
(
fram
mes are allow
wed.
IP
Pv4: The QC
CE will match
h only IPV4 fframes.
IP
Pv6: The QC
CE will match
h only IPV6 fframes.
P
Port
In
ndicates the list of portss configured
d with the QCE.
Q
A
Action
In
ndicates the classificatio
on action tak
ken on ingre
ess frame if parameters configured are
m
matched with
h the frame's content.
There are thrree action fields: Class, D
DPL and DSC
CP.
C
Class: Classiffied QoS classs; if a frame
e matches th
he QCE it will be put in the queue.
D
DPL: Drop Prrecedence Le
evel; if a fra me matchess the QCE th
hen DP level will set to value
v
displayed under DPL colu
umn.
D
DSCP: If a fra
ame matche
es the QCE th
hen DSCP will
w be classified with thee value displayed
under DSCP column.
c
211
C
Conflict
D
Displays Confflict status of
o QCL entrie
es. As H/W resources
r
are
e shared by multiple
applications. It may happ
pen that ressources requ
uired to add a QCE may not be available,
in
n that case itt shows conflict status a
as 'Yes', othe
erwise it is always
a
'No'. Please note that
co
onflict can be
b resolved by
b releasing
g the H/W re
esources required to add
d QCL entry on
p
pressing 'Resolve Conflicct' button.
B
Buttons
: Selectt the QCL sta
atus from th
his drop dow
wn list.
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o refresh the
e page auto
omatically. A
Automatic re
efresh
o
occurs at regular intervals.
R
Resolve Con
nflict: Click to release th
he resourcess required to
o add QCL eentry, incase
co
onflict statu
us for any QC
CL entry is 'yyes'.
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page; a
any changess made locally will be un
ndone
6.1.2.5 Detailed Port
P
Statistiics
ovides detailed traffic sttatistics for a specific sw
witch port. U
Use the port select
This page pro
box to select which switcch port deta
ails to display.
b
d counters are
a the totalls for receive
e and transm
mit, the size counters fo
or
The displayed
re
eceive and transmit,
t
and
d the error ccounters forr receive and
d transmit.
212
Receive Total and Transmit Total
Rx and Tx Packets
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets.
Rx and Tx Octets
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes. Includes FCS, but
excludes framing bits.
Rx and Tx Unicast
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) unicast packets.
Rx and Tx Multicast
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) multicast packets.
Rx and Tx Broadcast
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) broadcast packets.
Rx and Tx Pause
A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an
opcode indicating a PAUSE operation.
Receive and Transmit Size Counters
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets split into categories
based on their respective frame sizes.
213
Receive and Transmit Queue Counters
The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue.
Receive Error Counters
Rx Drops
The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion.
Rx CRC/Alignment
The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors.
Rx Undersize
The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC.
Rx Oversize
The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC.
Rx Fragments
The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC.
Rx Jabber
The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC.
Rx Filtered
The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.
1
Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes.
2
Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length
for this port.
Transmit Error Counters
Tx Drops
The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion.
Tx Late/Exc. Coll.
The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions.
214
B
Buttons
T
The port sele
ect box determines whicch port is afffected by cliicking the bu
uttons.
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
C
Clear: Clearss the counters for the se
elected port..
A
Auto-refresh
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
: Check this box to
in
ntervals.
6.1. 3 Monitor
M
/ Se
ecurity
6.1.3.1 Security / Access
A
Man
nagement Statistics
ovides statistics for acce
ess managem
ment.
This page pro
215
Interface
The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch.
Received Packets
Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is
enabled.
Allowed Packets
Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is
enabled.
Discarded Packets
Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is
enabled.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clear all statistics.
6.1.3.2 Security / Network
Port Security Switch Status
This page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct
configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules.
When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for
software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed
on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this
new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding
state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to
forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides
otherwise.
The status page is divided into two sections - one with a legend of user modules and one
with the actual port status.
216
User Module Legend
The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services.
User Module Name
The full name of a module that may request Port Security services.
Abbr
A one-letter abbreviation of the user module. This is used in the Users column in the
port status table.
Port Status
The table has one row for each port on the switch and a number of columns, which are:
Port
The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the status
for this particular port.
Users
Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled
Port Security or not. A '-' means that the corresponding user module is not enabled,
whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter (see Abbr)
has enabled port security.
State
Shows the current state of the port. It can take one of four values:
217
Disabled: No user modules are currently using the Port Security service.
Ready: The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module, and is awaiting
frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive.
Limit Reached: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user
module, and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC
addresses should be taken in.
Shutdown: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user
module, and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded. No MAC addresses
can be learned on the port until it is administratively re-opened on the Limit Control
configuration Web-page.
MAC Count (Current, Limit)
The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses (forwarding
as well as blocked) and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on
the port, respectively.
If no user modules are enabled on the port, the Current column will show a dash (-).
If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port, the Limit column will show
a dash (-).
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Port Security Port Status
This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module. Port Security is
a module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other
modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port,
the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC
addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules
whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be
set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on
allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked
until that user module decides otherwise.
218
MAC Address & VLAN ID
The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port. If no MAC addresses are learned,
a single row stating "No MAC addresses attached" is displayed.
State
Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding. In the
blocked state, it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic.
Time of Addition
Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port.
Age/Hold
If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address, it will stay in the
blocked state until the hold time (measured in seconds) expires. If all user modules have
decided to allow this MAC address to forward, and aging is enabled, the Port Security
module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic. If the age
period (measured in seconds) expires and no frames have been seen, the MAC address
will be removed from the MAC table. Otherwise a new age period will begin.
If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely, a
dash (-) will be shown.
219
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Security / Network / NAS
This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states.
Port
The switch port number. Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port.
220
Admin State
The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of
possible values.
Port State
The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual
states.
Last Source
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for
EAPOL-based authentication, and the most recently received frame from a new client
for MAC-based authentication.
Last ID
The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently received Response
Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the source MAC address
from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.
QoS Class
QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled.
Port VLAN ID
The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not
overridden by NAS.
If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to
the VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.
If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read
more about Guest VLANs here.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Port State
Admin State
The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of
221
possible values.
Port State
The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port state for a description of the individual
states.
QoS Class
The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server. The field is blank if no QoS class is
assigned.
Port VLAN ID
The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not
overridden by NAS.
If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to
the VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.
If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read
more about Guest VLANs here.
Port Counters
EAPOL Counters
These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states:
• Force Authorized
• Force Unauthorized
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
EAPOL Counters
Direction
Name
IEEE Name
Description
The number of valid EAPOL
Rx
Total
dot1xAuthEapolFramesRx
frames of any type that have
been received by the switch.
The number of valid EAPOL
Rx
Response dot1xAuthEapolRespIdFramesR Response Identity frames
ID
x
that have been received by
the switch.
Rx
Response
s
dot1xAuthEapolRespFramesRx
222
The number of valid EAPOL
response frames (other than
Response Identity frames)
that have been received by
the switch.
The number of EAPOL Start
Rx
Start
dot1xAuthEapolStartFramesRx frames that have been
received by the switch.
Rx
Logoff
dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFrames
Rx
The number of valid EAPOL
Logoff frames that have
been received by the switch.
The number of EAPOL
Rx
Invalid
dot1xAuthInvalidEapolFrames
Type
Rx
frames that have been
received by the switch in
which the frame type is not
recognized.
The number of EAPOL
Rx
Invalid
dot1xAuthEapLengthErrorFra
Length
mesRx
frames that have been
received by the switch in
which the Packet Body
Length field is invalid.
The number of EAPOL
Tx
Total
dot1xAuthEapolFramesTx
frames of any type that have
been transmitted by the
switch.
The number of EAPOL
Tx
Request
dot1xAuthEapolReqIdFramesT Request Identity frames that
ID
x
have been transmitted by
the switch.
The number of valid EAPOL
Request frames (other than
Tx
Requests
dot1xAuthEapolReqFramesTx Request Identity frames)
that have been transmitted
by the switch.
Backend Server Counters
These backend (RADIUS) frame counters are available for the following administrative
states:
• Port-based 802.1X
223
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.
Backend Server Counters
Direction
Name
IEEE Name
Description
802.1X-based:
Counts the
number of times
that the switch
receives the first
request from the
backend server
following the
first response
from the
supplicant.
Indicates that
Access
Rx
Challenge dot1xAuthBackendAccessChallenges
s
the backend
server has
communication
with the switch.
MAC-based:
Counts all Access
Challenges
received from
the backend
server for this
port (left-most
table) or client
(right-most
table).
802.1X-based:
Counts the
Rx
Other
dot1xAuthBackendOtherRequestsToSup number of times
Requests
plicant
that the switch
sends an EAP
Request packet
224
following the
first to the
supplicant.
Indicates that
the backend
server chose an
EAP-method.
MAC-based:
Not applicable.
802.1X- and
MAC-based:
Counts the
number of times
that the switch
receives a success
Rx
Auth.
Successes
dot1xAuthBackendAuthSuccesses
indication.
Indicates that
the
supplicant/client
has successfully
authenticated to
the backend
server.
802.1X- and
MAC-based:
Counts the
number of times
that the switch
receives a failure
Rx
Auth.
Failures
dot1xAuthBackendAuthFails
message. This
indicates that
the
supplicant/client
has not
authenticated to
the backend
server.
Tx
Responses dot1xAuthBackendResponses
225
802.1X-based:
Counts the
number of times
that the switch
attempts to send
a supplicant's
first response
packet to the
backend server.
Indicates the
switch
attempted
communication
with the
backend server.
Possible
retransmissions
are not counted.
MAC-based:
Counts all the
backend server
packets sent
from the switch
towards the
backend server
for a given port
(left-most table)
or client
(right-most
table). Possible
retransmissions
are not counted.
Last Supplicant/Client Info
Information about the last supplicant/client that attempted to authenticate. This
information is available for the following administrative states:
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
226
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.
Last Supplicant/Client Info
Name
IEEE Name
Description
MAC
dot1xAuthLastEapolFrameSo The MAC address of the last
Address
urce
VLAN ID
-
supplicant/client.
The VLAN ID on which the last frame from
the last supplicant/client was received.
802.1X-based:
Version
dot1xAuthLastEapolFrameVe
rsion
The protocol version number carried in the
most recently received EAPOL frame.
MAC-based:
Not applicable.
802.1X-based:
The user name (supplicant identity) carried
Identity
in the most recently received Response
-
Identity EAPOL frame.
MAC-based:
Not applicable.
Selected Counters
Selected Counters
The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is in one of the following
administrative states:
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.
The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table, and will be empty
if no MAC address is currently selected. To populate the table, select one of the
attached MAC Addresses from the table below.
Attached MAC Addresses
Identity
Shows the identity of the supplicant, as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame.
Clicking the link causes the supplicant's EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be
227
shown in the Selected Counters table. If no supplicants are attached, it shows No
supplicants attached.
This column is not available for MAC-based Auth.
MAC Address
For Multi 802.1X, this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant.
For MAC-based Auth., this column holds the MAC address of the attached client.
Clicking the link causes the client's Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected
Counters table. If no clients are attached, it shows No clients attached.
VLAN ID
This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured
through the Port Security module.
State
The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated. In the authenticated state, it
is allowed to forward frames on the port, and in the unauthenticated state, it is blocked.
As long as the backend server hasn't successfully authenticated the client, it is
unauthenticated. If an authentication fails for one or the other reason, the client will
remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds.
Last Authentication
Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client (successful as well as
unsuccessful).
Buttons
The port select box determines which port is affected when clicking the buttons.
228
A
Auto-refresh
C
Check this bo
ox to enable
e an automa
atic refresh of
o the page at regular in
ntervals.
C
Click to refre
esh the page
e immediate
ely.
This button iss available in the follow
wing modes:
orized
• Force Autho
uthorized
• Force Unau
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
C
Click to clear the counters for the se
elected port..
This button iss available in the follow
wing modes:
• Multi 802.1X
d Auth.X
• MAC-based
C
Click to clear both the po
ort counterss and all of the
t attached
d client's cou
unters. The "Last
C
Client" will not
n be cleare
ed, howeverr.
This button iss available in the follow
wing modes:
• Multi 802.1X
d Auth.X
• MAC-based
C
Click to clear only the currently seleccted client's counters.
N
Network / ACL
A
Statu
us
This page sho
ows the ACL
L status by d
different ACL
L users. Each
h row descri bes the ACE
E that
iss defined. It is a conflict if a specificc ACE is not applied to the hardwarre due to
hardware lim
mitations. Th
he maximum
m number off ACEs is 256
6on each sw
witch.
229
User
Indicates the ACL user.
Ingress Port
Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:
All: The ACE will match all ingress port.
Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.
Frame Type
Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:
Any: The ACE will match any frame type.
EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE
will not get matched by IP and ARP frames.
ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.
IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.
IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.
IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.
IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.
IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.
IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.
Action
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Rate Limiter
Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When
230
Disabled is displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.
Port Copy
Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are copied to
the port number. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number. When
Disabled is displayed, the port copy operation is disabled.
Mirror
Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".
CPU
Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.
CPU Once
Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.
Counter
The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
Conflict
Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE. The specific ACE is not applied to the
hardware due to hardware limitations.
Buttons
: Select the ACL status from this drop down list.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
231
DHCP Snooping Statistics
This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping. The statistics show only packet counters
when DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled. And it doesn't count
the DHCP packets for DHCP client.
Receive and Transmit Packets
Rx and Tx Discover
The number of discover (option 53 with value 1) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Offer
The number of offer (option 53 with value 2) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Request
The number of request (option 53 with value 3) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Decline
The number of decline (option 53 with value 4) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx ACK
The number of ACK (option 53 with value 5) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx NAK
The number of NAK (option 53 with value 6) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Release
The number of release (option 53 with value 7) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Inform
The number of inform (option 53 with value 8) packets received and transmitted.
232
Rx and Tx Lease Query
The number of lease query (option 53 with value 10) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned
The number of lease unassigned (option 53 with value 11) packets received and
transmitted.
Rx and Tx Lease Unknown
The number of lease unknown (option 53 with value 12) packets received and
transmitted.
Rx and Tx Lease Active
The number of lease active (option 53 with value 13) packets received and transmitted.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears the counters for the selected port.
DHCP Relay Statistics
This page provides statistics for DHCP relay.
233
Server Statistics
Transmit to Server
The number of packets that are relayed from client to server.
Transmit Error
The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients.
Receive from Server
The number of packets received from server.
Receive Missing Agent Option
The number of packets received without agent information options.
Receive Missing Circuit ID
The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing.
Receive Missing Remote ID
The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing.
Receive Bad Circuit ID
The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID.
Receive Bad Remote ID
The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID.
Client Statistics
Transmit to Client
The number of relayed packets from server to client.
234
Transmit Error
The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers.
Receive from Client
The number of received packets from server.
Receive Agent Option
The number of received packets with relay agent information option.
Replace Agent Option
The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option.
Keep Agent Option
The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained.
Drop Agent Option
The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent
information.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears statistics.
Network / Dynamic ARP Inspection Table
Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic ARP
Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries, and is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID,
then by MAC address, and then by IP address.
Navigating the ARP Inspection Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table, default being
20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web
page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection
Table.
The "Start from port address", "VLAN", "MAC address" and "IP address" input fields
allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table. Clicking
the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next
Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a
button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous
refresh with the same start address.
The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup.
235
When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the button to start over.
ARP Inspection Table Columns
Port
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.
VLAN ID
VLAN-ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted.
MAC Address
User MAC address of the entry.
IP Address
User IP address of the entry.
236
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Flushes all dynamic entries.
/<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection
Tables.
>>: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
Network / Dynamic IP Source Guard Table
Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic IP
Source Guard Table is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, then by IP address, and then
by MAC address.
Navigating the IP Source Guard Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table, default
being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the
web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source
Guard Table.
The "Start from port address", "VLAN" and "IP address" input fields allow the user to
select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table. Clicking the button will
update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source
Guard Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a button click - assume
the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same
start address.
The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup.
When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the button to start over.
237
IP Source Guard Table Columns
Port
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.
VLAN ID
VLAN-ID in which the IP traffic is permitted.
IP Address
User IP address of the entry.
MAC Address
Source MAC address.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Flushes all dynamic entries.
/<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic IP Source Guard
Tables.
>>: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
6.1.3.3 Security / AAA
This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the
238
Authentication configuration page.
RADIUS Authentication Servers
#
The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.
IP Address
The IP address and UDP port number (in <IP Address>:<UDP Port> notation) of this
server.
State
The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:
Disabled: The server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS
module is ready to accept access attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply
within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get
re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is
displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is
enabled.
RADIUS Accounting Servers
#
The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.
239
IP Address
The IP address and UDP port number (in <IP Address>:<UDP Port> notation) of this
server.
State
The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:
Disabled: The server is disabled
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS
module is ready to accept accounting attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts were made to this server, but it did not
reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will
get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this
occurs is displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one
server is enabled.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
RADIUS Authentication Statistics
This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server.
240
RADIUS Authentication Statistics
The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668-RADIUS.Authentication Client
MIB.
Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.
Packet Counters
RADIUS authentication server packet counter. There are seven receive and four transmit
counters.
Direction
Name
RFC4668 Name
Description
radiusAuthClientExtAcces The number of RADIUS Access-Accept packets
Rx
Access Accepts
sAccepts
(valid or invalid) received from the server.
radiusAuthClientExtAcces The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets
Rx
Access Rejects
sRejects
(valid or invalid) received from the server.
The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge
Access
radiusAuthClientExtAc
Challenges
cessChallenges
Rx
packets (valid or invalid) received from
the server.
The number of malformed RADIUS
Access-Response packets received from
Rx
Malformed
radiusAuthClientExtM the server. Malformed packets include
Access
alformedAccessRespon packets with an invalid length. Bad
Responses
ses
authenticators or Message Authenticator
attributes or unknown types are not
included as malformed access responses.
The number of RADIUS Access-Response
Bad
radiusAuthClientExtBa packets containing invalid authenticators
Rx
Authenticator
dAuthenticators
or Message Authenticator attributes
s
received from the server.
The number of RADIUS packets that were
Unknown
radiusAuthClientExtUn received with unknown types from the
Types
knownTypes
Rx
server on the authentication port and
dropped.
The number of RADIUS packets that were
Packets
Radius Auth Client
received from the server on the
Dropped
Ext-Packets Dropped
authentication port and dropped for
Rx
some other reason.
Tx
Access Requests
The number of RADIUS Access-Request
Radius
241
AuthClientExtAccess
packets sent to the server. This does not
Requests
include retransmissions.
The number of RADIUS Access-Request
Access
radiusAuthClientExtAc
Tx
packets retransmitted to the RADIUS
Retransmissio
cessRetransmissions
authentication server.
ns
The number of RADIUS Access-Request
packets destined for the server that have
not yet timed out or received a response.
Pending
radiusAuthClientExtPe This variable is incremented when an
Requests
ndingRequests
Tx
Access-Request is sent and decremented
due to receipt of an Access-Accept,
Access-Reject, Access-Challenge, timeout,
or retransmission.
The number of authentication timeouts to
the server. After a timeout, the client may
retry to the same server, send to a
radiusAuthClientExtTime different server, or give up. A retry to the
Tx
Timeouts
same server is counted as a retransmit as
outs
well as a timeout. A send to a different
server is counted as a Request as well as a
timeout.
Other Info
This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip
time.
Name
RFC4668 Name
Description
Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the following values:
Disabled: The selected server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up
and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running,
State
-
and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server,
but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has
temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the
dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is
displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more
242
than one server is enabled.
The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between the most
Radius
recent Access-Reply/Access-Challenge and the Access-Request that
Round-Trip
AuthClientExtRoundTri matched it from the RADIUS authentication server. The granularity of
Time
pTime
this measurement is 100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that there
hasn't been round-trip communication with the server yet.
RADIUS Accounting Statistics
The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670-RADIUS.Accounting Client MIB.
Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.
Packet Counters
RADIUS accounting server packet counter. There are five receive and four transmit
counters.
Direction
Name
RFC4670 Name
Description
radiusAccClientExtRespons The number of RADIUS packets (valid or
Rx
Responses
es
invalid) received from the server.
The number of malformed RADIUS
packets received from the server.
Malformed
radiusAccClientExtMalfor Malformed packets include packets with
Responses
medResponses
Rx
an invalid length. Bad authenticators or
unknown types are not included as
malformed access responses.
Rx
Bad
radiusAcctClientExtBadAu The number of RADIUS packets
243
Authenticators
thenticators
containing invalid authenticators
received from the server.
The number of RADIUS packets of
radiusAccClientExtUnkno
Rx
unknown types that were received from
Unknown Types
wnTypes
the server on the accounting port.
The number of RADIUS packets that were
Packets
radiusAccClientExtPackets received from the server on the
Dropped
Dropped
Rx
accounting port and dropped for some
other reason.
The number of RADIUS packets sent to
radiusAccClientExtRequest
Tx
the server. This does not include
Requests
s
retransmissions.
The number of RADIUS packets
Retransmission radiusAccClientExtRetrans
Tx
retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting
missions
s
server.
The number of RADIUS packets destined
for the server that have not yet timed out
Pending
radiusAccClientExtPendin or received a response. This variable is
Requests
gRequests
Tx
incremented when a Request is sent and
decremented due to receipt of a
Response, timeout, or retransmission.
The number of accounting timeouts to
the server. After a timeout, the client may
retry to the same server, send to a
radiusAccClientExtTimeou different server, or give up. A retry to the
Tx
Timeouts
ts
same server is counted as a retransmit as
well as a timeout. A send to a different
server is counted as a Request as well as a
timeout.
Other Info
This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip
time.
Name
RFC4670 Name
Description
Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the following
State
-
values:
Not Ready:
244
Disabled: The selected server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not
yet up and running.
aReady: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and
running, and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting
attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts were made to
this server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout.
The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get
re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of
seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This
state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.
The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between the most
recent Response and the Request that matched it from the
Round-Trip radiusAccClientExtRou
RADIUS accounting server. The granularity of this measurement
Time
ndTripTime
is 100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn't been
round-trip communication with the server yet.
Buttons
The server select box determines which server is affected by clicking the buttons.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears the counters for the selected server. The “Pending Requests” counter will
not be cleared by this operations..
6.1.3.4 Switch / SNMP / RMON
RMON Statistics Overview
This page provides an overview of RMON statistics entries.
245
The displayed counters are:
Data Source
The port ID which wants to be monitored.
Drop
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the
network.
Pkts
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
Broad-cast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.
Multi-cast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Errors
The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.
Under-size
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
246
Over-size
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
Frag.
The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Jabb.
The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Coll.
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
64
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in
length.
65~127
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 to
127 octets in length.
128~255
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 to
255 octets in length.
256~511
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 to
511 octets in length.
512~1023
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 to
1023 octets in length.
1024~1588
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024
to1588 octets in length.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
247
RMON History Overview
This page provides an overview of RMON history entries.
The displayed fields are:
History Index
Indicates the index of History control entry.
Sample Index
Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry
Sample Start
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
Drops
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the
network.
Pkts
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
248
Broadcast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.
Multicast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRCErrors
The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.
Undersize
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
Oversize
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
Frag.
The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Jabb.
The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Coll.
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
Utilization
The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface
during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
RMON Alarm Overview
This page provides an overview of RMON alarm entries.
The displayed fields are:
249
ID
Indicates the index of Alarm control entry.
Interval
Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling
threshold.
Variable
Indicates the particular variable to be sampled
Sample Type
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared
against the thresholds, possible sample types are:
Rising Threshold
Rising threshold value.
Rising Index
Rising event index.
Falling Threshold
Falling threshold value.
Falling Index
Falling event index.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
250
RMON Event Overview
This page provides an overview of RMON event entries.
The displayed fields are:
Event Index
Indicates the index of the event entry.
Log Index
Indicates the index of the log entry.
Log Time
Indicates Event log time
Log Description
Indicates the Event description.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
251
6.1.4 LACP System Status
6.1.4.1 System Status
This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances.
Aggr ID
The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance. For LLAG the id is shown
as 'isid:aggr-id' and for GLAGs as 'aggr-id'
Partner System ID
The system ID (MAC address) of the aggregation partner.
Partner Key
The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.
Last changed
The time since this aggregation changed.
Local Ports
Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
252
6.1.4.2 LACP Port Status
This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports.
Port
The switch port number.
LACP
'Yes' means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up. 'No' means that LACP is not
enabled or that the port link is down. 'Backup' means that the port could not join the
aggregation group but will join if other port leaves. Meanwhile it's LACP status is
disabled.
Key
The key assigned to this port. Only ports with the same key can aggregate together.
Aggr ID
The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group.
Partner System ID
The partner's System ID (MAC address).
Partner Port
The partner's port number connected to this port.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
253
6.1.4.3 LACP statistics
This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports.
Port
The switch port number.
LACP Received
Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port.
LACP Transmitted
Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port.
Discarded
Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears the counters for all ports.
6.1.5 Loop Protection
This page displays the loop protection port status the ports of the switch.
Loop protection port status is:
254
P
Port
The switch po
ort number of the logiccal port.
A
Action
The currentlyy configured
d port action
n.
Trransmit
The currentlyy configured
d port transm
mit mode.
Loops
his port.
The number of loops dettected on th
S
Status
of the port.
The current loop protecttion status o
Loop
W
Whether a lo
oop is curren
ntly detected
d on the porrt.
Time of Lastt Loop
t last loop
p event dete
ected.
The time of the
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
A
Auto-refresh
: Checck this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th
he page at
re
egular intervvals.
6.1.6 ST
TP Bridge Status
S
This page pro
ovides a stattus overview
w of all STP bridge
b
instances.
6.1.6.1 Bridge Sta
atus
d table conttains a row ffor each STP
P bridge instance, wheree the column
n
The displayed
f
information:
displays the following
255
M
MSTI
The Bridge In
nstance. Thiss is also a lin
nk to the STP
P Detailed Bridge
B
Statuss
B
Bridge ID
The Bridge ID
D of this Brid
dge instance
e.
R
Root ID
The Bridge ID
D of the currrently electe
ed root bridge.
R
Root Port
The switch po
ort currently
y assigned th
he root portt role.
R
Root Cost
R
Root Path Co
ost. For the Root
R
Bridge it is zero. Fo
or all other Bridges, it iss the sum off the
Port Path Cossts on the le
east cost patth to the Roo
ot Bridge.
To
opology Flag
The current state
s
of the Topology Ch
hange Flag of
o this Bridg
ge instance.
To
opology Ch
hange Last
The time sincce last Topollogy Change
e occurred.
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
256
6.1.6.2 STP Port Sttatus
This page dissplays the ST
TP CIST port status for physical
p
ports of the swittch.
TP port status is:
ST
P
Port
The switch po
ort number of the logiccal STP port.
C
CIST Role
The current STP
S port role
e of the CIST
T port. The port
p
role can
n be one of the followin
ng
va
alues: AlterrnatePort BackupPort
B
t RootPort Designated
D
dPort Disab
bled.
C
CIST State
The current STP
S port statte of the CISST port. The port state can
c be one o
of the follow
wing
va
alues: Disca
arding Learrning Forw
warding.
U
Uptime
The time sincce the bridge port was l ast initialize
ed.
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
257
6.1.6.3 STP Port Statistics
This page displays the STP port statistics counters of bridge ports in the switch.
The STP port statistics counters are:
Port
The switch port number of the logical STP port.
MSTP
The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
RSTP
The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
STP
The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
TCN
The number of (legacy) Topology Change Notification BPDU's received/transmitted on
the port.
Discarded Unknown
The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.
Discarded Illegal
The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.
258
259
B
Buttons
R
Refresh:: Click to refresh
h the page iimmediately
y.
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of the page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
M
Status
6.1.7 MVR
6.1.7.1 Statistics
This page pro
ovides MVR Statistics infformation.
V
VLAN ID
The Multicastt VLAN ID.
V
V1 Reports Received
The number of Received V1 Reports .
V
V2 Reports Received
The number of Received V2 Reports .
V
V3 Reports Received
The number of Received V3 Reports .
260
V
V2 Leaves Received
R
The number of Received V2 Leaves.
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
C
Clear: Clearss all Statistics counters.
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
6.1.7.2 MVR Group Table
Entries in the
e MVR Group Table are shown on th
his page. The MVR Grou
up Table is sorted
s
fiirst by VLAN
N ID, and the
en by group .
N
Navigating the MVR Group
G
Table
e
Each page sh
hows up to 99
9 entries fro
om the MVR
R Group table, default b
being 20, selected
th
hrough the "entries perr page" inpu
ut field. When first visited, the web
b page will show
th
he first 20 entries from the beginni ng of the MVR
M
Group Table.
T
The "Start fro
om VLAN", and "group
p" input field
ds allow the
e user to seleect the starting
p
point in the MVR
M
Group Table. Click
king the Reffresh button
n will updatte the displayed
ta
able starting
g from that or the close
est next MVR
R Group Tab
ble match. In
n addition, the
tw
wo input fie
elds will - up
pon a Refressh button click - assume
e the value o
of the first
uous refresh
displayed enttry, allowing
g for continu
h with the sa
ame start ad
ddress.
The >> will use
u the last entry
e
of the currently diisplayed table as a basiss for the nex
xt
lo
ookup. Whe
en the end iss reached th e text "No more
m
entriess" is shown in the displa
ayed
ta
able. Use the |<< button
n to start ovver.
261
M
MVR Group Table Colu
umns
V
VLAN ID
V
VLAN ID of th
he group.
G
Groups
G
Group ID of the
t group displayed.
P
Port Membe
ers
Ports under this
t
group.
B
Buttons
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
R
Refresh: Reffreshes the displayed
d
ta ble starting from the input fields.
|<
<<: Updates the table sttarting from
m the first en
ntry in the MVR
M
Group TTable.
>>: Updates the
t table, sttarting with the entry after the lastt entry curreently displayed.
6.1.8 Monitor
M
/ IPM
MC / IGMP Snooping
6.1.8.1 IGMP Snoo
oping
IG
GMP Snoop
ping Status
s
This page pro
ovides IGMP
P Snooping sstatus.
V
VLAND ID
The VLAN ID of the entry
y.
262
Q
Querier Version
W
Working Que
erier Version
n currently.
H
Host Version
n
W
Working Hosst Version cu
urrently.
Q
Querier Stattus
Shows the Qu
uerier statuss is "ACTIVE
E" or "IDLE".
s
interrface is adm
ministratively
y disabled.
"DISABLE" denotes the specific
Q
Queries Tran
nsmitted
The number of Transmittted Queries..
Q
Queries Recceived
The number of Received Queries.
V
V1 Reports Received
The number of Received V1 Reports .
V
V2 Reports Received
The number of Received V2 Reports .
V
V3 Reports Received
The number of Received V3 Reports .
V
V2 Leaves Received
R
The number of Received V2 Leaves.
R
Router Portt
D
Display which
h ports act as
a router po rts. A routerr port is a po
ort on the Etthernet swittch
th
hat leads tow
wards the Layer 3 multiicast device or IGMP querier.
nfigured to be a router port.
Sttatic denote
es the specific port is con
D
Dynamic den
notes the spe
ecific port iss learnt to be
e a router port.
Both denotess the specific port is con
nfigured and
d learnt to be
b a router p
port.
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
C
Clear: Clearss all Statistics counters.
A
Auto-refresh
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
: Check this box to
in
ntervals.
263
IGMP Group Information
Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page. The IGMP Group Table is
sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group.
Navigating the IGMP Group Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show
the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table.
The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting
point in the IGMP Group Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed
table starting from that or the closest next IGMP Group Table match. In addition, the
two input fields will - upon a Refresh button click - assume the value of the first
displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The >> will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed
table. Use the |<< button to start over.
IGMP Group Table Columns
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Groups
Group address of the group displayed.
Port Members
Ports under this group.
264
B
Buttons
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
R
Refresh: Reffreshes the displayed
d
ta ble starting from the input fields.
|<
<<: Updates the table, sttarting with
h the first en
ntry in the IG
GMP Group Table.
>>: Updates the
t table, sttarting with the entry after the lastt entry curreently displayed.
IG
GMP SFM In
nformation
n Table
Entries in the
e IGMP SFM Information
n Table are shown
s
on th
his page. Thee IGMP SFM
M
(SSource-Filterred Multicasst) Informatiion Table also contains the SSM (So
ource-Specific
M
Multicast) infformation. This
T
table is sorted first by VLAN ID,, then by gro
oup, and then by
Port No. Different source
e addresses belong to th
he same gro
oup are treatted as single
e
entry.
N
Navigating the IGMP SFM
S
Inform
mation Tablle
Each page sh
hows up to 99
9 entries fro
om the IGMP SFM Information tablle, default being
b
20, selected through
t
the
e "entries pe
er page" inp
put field. Wh
hen first visitted, the web
b
p
page will sho
ow the first 20
2 entries frrom the beg
ginning of th
he IGMP SFM
M Informatio
on
Table.
The "Start fro
om VLAN", and "group
p" input field
ds allow the
e user to seleect the starting
p
point in the IGMP
I
SFM In
nformation T
Table. Clickiing the Refrresh button
n will update
e the
displayed tab
ble starting from
f
that orr the closestt next IGMP SFM Inform
mation Table
m
match. In add
dition, the two input fie
elds will - up
pon a Refresh button cclick - assume the
va
alue of the first
f
displaye
ed entry, alllowing for continuous
c
refresh
r
with the same sttart
265
address.
The >> will use
u the last entry
e
of the currently diisplayed table as a basiss for the nex
xt
ookup. Whe
en the end iss reached th e text "No more
m
entriess" is shown in the displa
ayed
lo
ta
able. Use the |<< button
n to start ovver.
IG
GMP SFM In
nformation
n Table Collumns
V
VLAN ID
V
VLAN ID of th
he group.
G
Group
G
Group address of the gro
oup displaye
ed.
P
Port
Sw
witch port number.
n
M
Mode
In
ndicates the filtering mo
ode maintaiined per (VL
LAN ID, port number, Grroup Addresss)
b
basis. It can be
b either Incclude or Excllude.
S
Source Address
P Address off the source. Currently, ssystem limitss the total number of IPP source addresses
IP
fo
or filtering to
t be 128.
Ty
ype
In
ndicates the Type. It can
n be either A
Allow or Den
ny.
B
Buttons
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
R
Refresh: Reffreshes the displayed
d
ta ble starting from the input fields.
|<
<<: Updates the table sttarting from
m the first en
ntry in the IG
GMP SFM Infformation Table.
>>: Updates the
t table, sttarting with the entry after the lastt entry curreently displayed.
6.1.8.2 MLD Snooping Statu
us
This page pro
ovides MLD Snooping sttatus.
266
VLAND ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
Querier Version
Working Querier Version currently.
Host Version
Working Host Version currently.
Querier Status
Show the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".
"DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.
Queries Transmitted
The number of Transmitted Queries.
Queries Received
The number of Received Queries.
V1 Reports Received
The number of Received V1 Reports.
V2 Reports Received
The number of Received V2 Reports.
V1 Leaves Received
The number of Received V1 Leaves.
267
R
Router Portt
D
Display which
h ports act as
a router po rts. A routerr port is a po
ort on the Etthernet swittch
th
hat leads tow
wards the Layer 3 multiicast device or IGMP querier.
nfigured to be a router port.
Sttatic denote
es the specific port is con
D
Dynamic den
notes the spe
ecific port iss learnt to be
e a router port.
Both denotess the specific port is con
nfigured and
d learnt to be
b a router p
port.
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
C
Clear: Clearss all Statistics counters.
A
Auto-refresh
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
: Check this box to
in
ntervals.
M
MLD Group Table
Entries in the
e MLD Group
p Table are shown on th
his page. The MLD Grou
up Table is sorted
s
fiirst by VLAN
N ID, and the
en by group .
N
Navigating the MLD Group
G
Table
e
Each page sh
hows up to 99
9 entries fro
om the MLD
D Group table, default b
being 20, selected
th
hrough the "entries perr page" inpu
ut field. When first visited, the web
b page will show
th
he first 20 entries from the beginni ng of the MLD
M Group Table.
T
The "Start fro
om VLAN", and "group
p" input field
ds allow the
e user to seleect the starting
p
point in the MLD
M Group Table. Click
king the Refresh button
n will updatee the displayed
able starting
g from that or the next closest MLD
D Group Table match. In
n addition, the
ta
268
tw
wo input fie
elds will - up
pon a Refressh button click - assume
e the value o
of the first
displayed enttry, allowing
g for continu
h with the sa
ame start ad
ddress.
uous refresh
The >> will use
u the last entry
e
of the currently diisplayed as a basis for th
he next look
kup.
W
When the en
nd is reached
d the text "N
No more enttries" is show
wn in the diisplayed tab
ble.
U
Use the |<< button
b
to sta
art over.
B
Buttons
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
R
Refresh: Reffreshes the displayed
d
ta ble starting from the input fields.
|<
<<: Updates the table sttarting from
m the first en
ntry in the MLD
M Group TTable.
>>: Updates the
t table, sttarting with the entry after the last entry curreently displayed.
M
MLD SFM In
nformation
n Table
Entries in the
e MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this page. Thee MLD SFM
(SSource-Filterred Multicasst) Informatiion Table also contains the SSM (So
ource-Specific
M
Multicast) infformation. This
T
table is sorted first by VLAN ID,, then by gro
oup, and then by
Port No. Different source
e addresses belong to th
he same gro
oup are treatted as single
e
entry.
N
Navigating the MLD SFM Inform
mation Table
e
Each page sh
hows up to 64
6 entries fro
om the MLD
D SFM Inform
mation tablee, default be
eing
20, selected through
t
the
e "entries pe
er page" inp
put field. Wh
hen first visitted, the web
b
page will sho
ow the first 20
2 entries frrom the beg
ginning of th
he MLD SFM
M Informatio
on
p
269
Table.
The "Start fro
om VLAN", and "group
p" input field
ds allow the
e user to seleect the starting
p
point in the MLD
M SFM Information T
Table. Clickin
ng the butto
on will updaate the displlayed
ta
able starting
g from that or the close
est next MLD
D SFM Inform
mation Tablee match. In
addition, the
e two input fields
f
will - u
upon a buttton click - assume the vaalue of the first
f
displayed enttry, allowing
g for continu
uous refresh
h with the sa
ame start ad
ddress.
The will use the
t last entrry of the currrently displa
ayed as a ba
asis for the n
next lookup.
W
When the en
nd is reached
d the text "N
No more enttries" is show
wn in the diisplayed tab
ble.
U
Use the butto
on to start over.
o
M
MLD SFM In
nformation
n Table Colu
umns
V
VLAN ID
V
VLAN ID of th
he group.
G
Group
G
Group address of the gro
oup displaye
ed.
P
Port
Sw
witch port number.
n
M
Mode
In
ndicates the filtering mo
ode maintaiined per (VL
LAN ID, port number, Grroup Addresss)
b
basis. It can be
b either Incclude or Excllude.
S
Source Address
P Address off the source. Currently, ssystem limitss the total number of IPP source addresses
IP
fo
or filtering to
t be 128.
Ty
ype
In
ndicates the Type. It can
n be either A
Allow or Den
ny.
B
Buttons
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
R
Refresh: Reffreshes the displayed
d
ta ble starting from the input fields.
|<
<<: Updates the table sttarting from
m the first en
ntry in the MLD
M SFP Info
ormation Tab
ble.
>>: Updates the
t table, sttarting with the entry after the last entry curreently displayed.
270
6.1.9 Monitor / LLDP
6.1.9.1 LLDP / Neighbor
This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbours. The displayed table
contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected. The columns hold
the following information:
Local Port
The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
Chassis ID
The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbour's LLDP frames.
Remote Port ID
The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbour port.
System Name
System Name is the name advertised by the neighbour unit.
Port Description
Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit.
System Capabilities
System Capabilities describes the neighbour unit's capabilities. The possible
capabilities are:
1. Other
271
2. Repeaterr
3. Bridge
4. WAN Acccess Point
5. Router
6. Telephon
ne
7. DOCSIS cable device
8. Station only
o
9. Reserved
W
When a capa
ability is enabled, the ca
apability is fo
ollowed by (+).
( If the caapability is
disabled, the
e capability is followed b
by (-).
M
Managemen
nt Address
M
Managemen
nt Address is the neigh
hbour unit'ss address tha
at is used fo r higher layer
entities to asssist discoverry by the nettwork management. This could for instance hold the
neighbour's IP
I address.
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
6.1.9.2 LLDP MED Neighbourrs
ovides a stattus overview
w of all LLDP
P-MED neigh
hbours. The displayed ta
able
This page pro
ontains a ro
ow for each port
p
on whi ch an LLDP neighbour is detected. TThis functio
on
co
applies to Vo
oIP devices which
w
suppo
ort LLDP-MED
D. The colum
mns hold thee following
in
nformation:
272
Port
The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
Device Type
LLDP-MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types: Network Connectivity
Devices and Endpoint Devices.
LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device Definition
LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, provide access to the
IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices. An LLDP-MED
Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following
technologies:
1. LAN Switch / Router
2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge
3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater ( included for historical reasons )
4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point
5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA-1057
and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method.
LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Definition
LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, are located at the IEEE 802 LAN
network edge, and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP-MED
framework.
Within the LLDP-MED Endpoint Device category, the LLDP-MED scheme is broken into
further Endpoint Device Classes, as defined in the following.
Each LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined
for the previous Endpoint Device Class. For-example will any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device
claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint (Class II) also support all aspects of TIA-1057
applicable to Generic Endpoints (Class I), and any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming
compliance as a Communication Device (Class III) will also support all aspects of
TIA-1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints (Class II) and Generic Endpoints (Class I).
273
LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I)
The LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) definition is applicable to all endpoint
products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA-1057, however do
not support IP media or act as an end-user communication appliance. Such devices may
include (but are not limited to) IP Communication Controllers, other communication
related servers, or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA-1057.
Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration, device location,
network policy, power management, and inventory management.
LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II)
The LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) definition is applicable to all endpoint products
that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular
end user. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic
Endpoint Class (Class I), and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming.
Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include (but are not limited
to) Voice / Media Gateways, Conference Bridges, Media Servers, and similar.
Discovery services defined in this class include media-type-specific network layer policy
discovery.
LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III)
The LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) definition is applicable to all
endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media.
Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint
(Class I) and Media Endpoint (Class II) classes, and are extended to include aspects
related to end user devices. Example product categories expected to adhere to this class
include (but are not limited to) end user communication appliances, such as IP Phones,
PC-based softphones, or other communication appliances that directly support the end
user.
Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier (including
ECS / E911 information), embedded L2 switch support, inventory management.
LLDP-MED Capabilities
LLDP-MED Capabilities describes the neighbour unit's LLDP-MED capabilities. The
possible capabilities are:
274
1. LLDP-MED capabilities
2. Network Policy
3. Location Identification
4. Extended Power via MDI-PSE
5. Extended Power via MDI-PD
6. Inventory
7. Reserved
Application Type
Application Type indicating the primary function of the application(s) defined for this
network policy, advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device. The possible
application types are shown below.
1. Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances
supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate
VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data
applications.
2. Voice Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the
voice signaling than for the voice media.
3. Guest Voice - to support a separate limited feature-set voice service for guest users
and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances
supporting interactive voice services.
4. Guest Voice Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy
for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media.
5. Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices,
such as PCs or laptops.
6. Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other
similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.
7. Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution
and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific
network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not
be an intended use of this application type.
275
8. Video Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the
video signaling than for the video media.
Policy
Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is
required by the device. Can be either Defined or Unknown
Unknown: The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown.
Defined: The network policy is defined.
TAG
TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an
untagged VLAN. Can be Tagged or Untagged.
Untagged: The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a
tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
Tagged: The device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format.
VLAN ID
VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003. A
value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID. A value of 0 (Priority Tagged)
is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003,
meaning that only the IEEE 802.1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of
the ingress port is used instead.
Priority
Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. One of the
eight priority levels (0 through 7).
DSCP
DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified
application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. Contain one of 64 code point values (0
through 63).
276
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
6.1.9.3 LLDP EEE
By using EEE power savin
ngs can be a
achieved at the expense
e of traffic laatency. This
atency occurrs due to tha
at the circuitts EEE turn off
o to save power,
p
need
d time to boo
ot up
la
b
before sendin
ng traffic ov
ver the link. This time is called "wak
keup time". To achieve
m
minimal laten
ncy, devices can use LLD
DP to exchan
nge informattion about ttheir respecttive tx
and rx "wake
eup time ", as a way to agree upon
n the minimu
um wakeup time they need.
n
ovides an ov
verview of E EE informattion exchang
ged by LLDPP.
This page pro
bors EEE In
nformation
n
LLDP Neighb
d table conttains a row ffor each porrt. The colum
mns hold thee following
The displayed
nformation:
in
Local Port
w
LLDP frames are rreceived or transmitted.
The port on which
Tx
x Tw
The link partner’s maxim
mum time th at transmit path can ho
old off sendiing data afte
er
desertion of LPI.
R
Rx Tw
The link partner’s time th
hat receiver would like the
t transmittter to hold off to allow
w time
fo
or the receivver to wake from sleep.
277
Fallback Receive Tw
The link partner’s fallback receive Tw.
A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx.
Since a receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings, this provides
the transmitter with additional information that it may use for a more efficient
allocation. Systems that do not implement this option default the value to be the same
as that of the Receive Tw_sys_tx.
Echo Tx Tw
The link partner's Echo Tx Tw value
The respective echo values shall be defined as the local link partners reflection (echo) of
the remote link partners respective values. When a local link partner receives its echoed
values from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link
partner has received, registered and processed its most recent values. For example, if
the local link partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its
local MIB, then the local link partner infers that the remote link partners request was
based on stale information.
Echo Rx Tw
The link partner's Echo Rx Tw value.
Resolved Tx Tw
The resolved Tx Tw for this link. Note: NOT the link partner
The resolved value that is the actual "tx wakeup time " used for this link (based on EEE
information exchanged via LLDP).
Resolved Rx Tw
The resolved Rx Tw for this link. Note: NOT the link partner
The resolved value that is the actual "tx wakeup time " used for this link (based on
EEE information exchanged via LLDP).
EEE activated
278
Show if the switch
s
and the link part ner have ag
gree upon which
w
wakeu p times to use.
u
R
Red - Switch and link parrtner have n
not agreed upon
u
wakeu
up time.
G
Green - Switcch and link partner
p
have
e agreed up
pon wakeup time.
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
6.1.9.4 LLDP Statistics
This page pro
ovides an ov
verview of a ll LLDP trafffic.
Two types off counters arre shown. G lobal coun
nters are cou
unters that rrefer to the
w
whole switch
h, while loca
al counters refer to perr port counters for the ccurrently selected
sw
witch.
G
Global Coun
nters
N
Neighbour entries
e
were last chan
nged on
Itt also shows the time wh
hen the lastt entry was last deleted or added. Itt also shows the
tiime elapsed since the la
ast change w
was detected
d.
279
Total Neighbours Entries Added
Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.
Total Neighbours Entries Deleted
Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.
Total Neighbours Entries Dropped
Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full.
Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out
Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.
Local Counters
The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following
information:
Local Port
The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.
Tx Frames
The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.
Rx Frames
The number of LLDP frames received on the port.
Rx Errors
The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.
Frames Discarded
If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full, the
LLDP frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many
Neighbours" in the LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when
the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table. Entries are
removed from the table when a given port's link is down, an LLDP shutdown frame is
received, or when the entry ages out.
TLVs Discarded
Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs (TLV is short
for "Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and discarded.
280
TLVs Unreco
ognized
med TLVs, bu
ut with an unknown
u
typ
pe value.
The number of well-form
O
Org. Discard
ded
The number of organizationally rece
eived TLVs.
A
Age-Outs
Each LLDP fra
ame contain
ns informatio
on about ho
ow long time the LLDP iinformation
n is
alid (age-ou
ut time). If no new LLDP
P frame is recceived within the age o ut time, the
e LLDP
va
in
nformation is removed, and the Ag
ge-Out coun
nter is increm
mented.
B
Buttons
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
C
Clear: Clearss the local counters.
c
A ll counters (including
(
global countters) are cle
eared
upon reboot.
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
D
MAC
M
Table
6.1.10 Dynamic
Entries in the
e MAC Table
e are shown on this page. The MAC Table contaains up to 81
192
i sorted firsst by VLAND
D ID, then by
y MAC addre
ess.
entries, and is
N
Navigating the MAC Table
T
Each page sh
hows up to 999
9 entries ffrom the MA
AC table, deffault being 20, selected
d
hrough the "entries perr page" inpu
ut field. When first visited, the web
b page will show
th
th
he first 20 entries from the beginni ng of the MAC
M
Table. The first disp
played will be
b the
o
one with the
e lowest VLA
AN ID and th
he lowest MA
AC address found
f
in thee MAC Table
e.
om MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields allo
ow the user to select the
The "Start fro
utton will up
pdate the dissplayed table
sttarting point in the MAC Table. Cliccking the bu
sttarting from
m that or the
e closest nextt MAC Table
e match. In addition,
a
thee two input fields
w
will - upon a button click
k - assume th
he value of the first disp
played entryy, allowing for
f
co
ontinuous re
efresh with the same st art address.
The will use the
t last entrry of the currrently displa
ayed VLAN/MAC addresss pairs as a basis
or the next lookup.
l
When the end iis reached th
he text "No more entriees" is shown
n in
fo
th
he displayed
d table. Use the button to start over.
281
M
MAC Table Columns
C
S
Switch (stacck only)
e entry is lea
arned.
The stack uniit where the
Ty
ype
In
ndicates whe
ether the en
ntry is a stat ic or a dynamic entry.
M
MAC addresss
The MAC add
dress of the entry.
V
VLAN
The VLAN ID of the entry
y.
P
Port Membe
ers
The ports tha
at are memb
bers of the e
entry.
B
Buttons
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
R
Refresh: Reffreshes the displayed
d
tab
Start from M
MAC address" and
ble starting from the "S
"V
VLAN" inpu
ut fields.
C
Clear: Flushe
es all dynamic entries.
|<
<<: Updates the table sttarting from
m the first en
ntry in the MAC
M
Table, i..e. the entry
y with
th
he lowest VLLAN ID and MAC addresss.
>>: Updates the
t table, sttarting with the entry after the lastt entry curreently displayed.
282
6.1.11 VLAN Membership Status
This page provides an overview of membership status of VLAN users.
VLAN USER
VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN
memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID and UVID. Currently we support the
following VLAN user types:
CLI/Web/SNMP: These are referred to as static.
NAS: NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications between a
Supplicant, Authenticator, and an Authentication Server.
MVRP: Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) allows dynamic registration and
deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network.
Voice VLAN: Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating
from IP phones.
MVR: MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each
VLAN. Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single (multicast) VLAN.
MSTP: The 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol (MSTP) uses VLANs to create multiple
spanning trees in a network, which significantly improves network resource utilization while
maintaining a loop-free environment.
283
Port Members
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID.
If a port is included in a VLAN, an image
will be displayed.
If a port is included in a Forbidden port list, an image
will be displayed.
If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on
same Forbidden port, then conflict port will be displayed as
.
VLAN Membership
The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all
VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User (selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box).
When ALL VLAN Users are selected, it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users,
and this is by default. VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to
be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports.
Navigating the VLAN Monitor page
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show
the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the
one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table.
Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next
VLAN Table match. The will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a
basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown
in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.
Navigating the VLAN Monitor page
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show
the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the
one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table.
Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next
VLAN Table match. The will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a
basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown
in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.
284
B
Buttons
: Selectt VLAN Userss from this drop
d
down list.
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
V
VLAN Port Status
S
This page pro
ovides VLAN
N Port Statuss.
V
VLAN USER
V
VLAN User module
m
uses services of tthe VLAN ma
anagement functionalitty to configu
ure
V
VLAN membe
erships and VLAN port cconfiguratio
on such as PV
VID, UVID. C
Currently we
e
su
upport follo
owing VLAN User types:
C
CLI/Web/SNM
MP: These are
a referred to as static.
N
NAS: NAS prrovides port--based auth entication, which
w
involv
ves commun
nications
b
between a Su
upplicant, Authenticato
A
or, and an Authenticatio
on Server.
M
MVRP: Multiiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) allows dynamic reegistration and
deregistratio
on of VLANs on ports on
n a VLAN bridged netwo
ork.
V
Voice VLAN: Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice trafffic typically
o
originating from IP phon
nes.
M
MVR: MVR iss used to eliminate the need to dup
plicate multiicast traffic ffor subscribers in
each VLAN. Multicast
M
tra
affic for all cchannels is sent only on a single (mu
ulticast) VLA
AN.
285
MSTP: The 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol (MSTP) uses VLANs to create
multiple spanning trees in a network, which significantly improves network resource
utilization while maintaining a loop-free environment.
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
PVID
Shows the VLAN identifier for that port. The allowed values are 1 through 4095. The
default value is 1.
Port Type
Shows the Port Type. Port type can be any of Unaware, C-port, S-port, Custom S-port.
If Port Type is Unaware, all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not
removed.
C-port is Customer Port. S-port is Service port. Custom S-port is S-port with Custom TPID.
Ingress Filtering
Shows the ingress filtering on a port. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If
ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN,
the frame is discarded.
Frame Type
Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This parameter
affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged frames, untagged
frames received on that port are discarded.
Tx Tag
Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged.
UVID
Shows UVID (untagged VLAN ID). Port's UVID determines the packet's behavior at the
egress side.
Conflicts
Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or not. When a Volatile VLAN User requests to
set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration, the following conflicts can occur:
Functional Conflicts between features.
286
C
Conflicts due
e to hardwarre limitation
n.
D
Direct conflicct between user
u
module
es.
B
Buttons
: Selectt VLAN Userss from this drop
d
down list.
A
Auto-refresh
: Check this box to
o enable an automatic refresh of th e page at re
egular
in
ntervals.
R
Refresh: Clicck to refresh
h the page im
mmediately..
6.1.13 VCL
V
MAC-B
Based VLAN
N Status
This page sho
ows MAC-ba
ased VLAN e
entries configured by various MAC-b
based VLAN users.
C
Currently we
e support folllowing VLA
AN User type
es:
287
CLI/Web/SNMP: These are referred to as static.
NAS: NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications
between a Supplicant, Authenticator, and an Authentication Server.
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address.
VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID.
Port Members
Port members of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Buttons
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table.
288
6.1.14 sFlow
This page shows the sFlow Statistics.
Flow Sampling
Packet flow sampling refers to arbitrarily choosing some packets out of a specified
number, reading the first "Max Hdr Size" bytes and exporting the sampled datagram
for analysis.
The attributes associated with the flow sampling are: sampler type, sampling rate,
maximum header size.
Counter Sampling
Counter sampling performs periodic, time-based sampling or polling of counters
associated with an interface enabled for sFlow.
Attribute associated with counter sampling is polling interval.
sFlow Ports
List of the port numbers on which sFlow is configured.
Sampler Type
Configured sampler type on the port and could be any of the types: None, RX, TX, ALL.
289
6.2 Diagnostic
This section provides some convenient tool for user to do switch diagnostic from remote
site.
6.2.1 Ping
This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues.
Type the IP Address, ping length (default = 56 bytes), ping count (default=5) and ping
interval (default =1). Then press "Start" to start ping remote host. After you press
Start, 5 ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time
are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until
responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs.
ICMP Ping Output Result
PING server 192.168.2.100, 56 bytes of data.
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=0, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms
Sent 5 packets, received 5 OK, 0 bad
IP Address
The destination IP Address.
Ping Length
The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.
Ping Count
The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.
Ping Interval
The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds.
6.2.2 Ping6
This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity
issues.
283
Type the IPv6 Address, ping length (default = 56 bytes), ping count (default=5) and ping
interval (default =1). Then press "Start" to start ping remote host. After you press
Start, 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time
are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until
responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs.
ICMPv6 Ping Output
PING6 server ::10.10.132.20
64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=0, time=0ms
64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms
64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms
64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms
64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms
Sent 5 packets, received 5 OK, 0 bad
You can configure the following properties of the issued ICMP packets:
IP Address
The destination IP Address.
Ping Length
The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.
Ping Count
The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.
Ping Interval
The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds.
6.2.3 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostic
This page is used for running the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics.
Select the port and then press Start to run the diagnostics. This will take approximately
5 seconds. If all ports are selected, this can take approximately 15 seconds. When
completed, the page refreshes automatically, and you can view the cable diagnostics
results in the cable status table. Note that VeriPHY is only accurate for cables of length 7
- 140 meters.
291
10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running VeriPHY. Therefore, running
VeriPHY on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop
responding until VeriPHY is complete.
Port
The port where you are requesting VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics.
Cable Status
Port: Port number.
Pair: The status of the cable pair.
The status of the cable pair.
OK - Correctly terminated pair
Open - Open pair
Short - Shorted pair
Short A - Cross-pair short to pair A
Short B - Cross-pair short to pair B
Short C - Cross-pair short to pair C
Short D - Cross-pair short to pair D
Cross A - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair A
Cross B - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair B
Cross C - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair C
Cross D - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair D
Length: The length (in meters) of the cable pair.
292
6.3 Maintenance
The section allows user to maintain the switch, such as Reset Factory Default, Firmware
upgrading, Configuration Save/Restore and Restart the device.
6.3.1 Restart Device
You can restart the switch on this page. After restart, the switch will boot normally.
Yes: Click to restart device.
No: Click to return to the Port State page without restarting.
6.3.2 Factory Defaults
You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page. Only the IP configuration is
retained.
The new configuration is available immediately, which means that no restart is necessary.
Yes: Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults.
No: Click to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration.
286
Note: Restoring factory default can also be performed by making a physical loopback
between port 1 and port 2 within the first minute from switch reboot. In the first
minute after boot, 'loopback' packets will be transmitted at port 1. If a 'loopback'
packet is received at port 2 the switch will do a restore to default.
6.3.3 Software Upload
6.3.3.1 Firmware Update
This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch.
"Browse" to the location of a software image, you can see the file name in the right of
the Browse command. Click "Upload" to start the process.
After the software image is uploaded, a page announces that the firmware update is
initiated. After about a minute, the firmware is updated and the switch restarts.
Warning: While the firmware is being updated, Web access appears to be defunct. The
front LED flashes Green/Off with a frequency of 10 Hz while the firmware update is in
progress. Do not restart or power off the device at this time or the switch may fail
to function afterwards.
294
6.3.3.2 Image Select
There are 2 image saved within the switch.
This page provides information about the active and alternate (backup) firmware
images in the device, and allows you to revert to the alternate image.
The web page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate
firmware images.
Note:
1. In case the active firmware image is the alternate image, only the "Active Image"
table is shown. In this case, the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled.
2. If the alternate image is active (due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual
intervention), uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use
the primary image slot and activate this.
3. The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases.
This does not constitute an error.
Image Information
Image
The flash index name of the firmware image. The name of primary (preferred) image is
image, the alternate image is named image.bk.
Version
The version of the firmware image.
Date
The date where the firmware was produced.
295
Buttons
Activate Alternate Image: Click to use the alternate image. This button may be
disabled depending on system state.
Cancel: Cancel activating the backup image. Navigates away from this page.
6.3.4 Configuration
You can save/view or load the switch configuration. The configuration file is in XML
format with a hierarchy of tags:
Header tags: <?xml version="1.0"?> and <configuration>. These tags are mandatory
and must be present at the beginning of the file.
Section tags: <platform>, <global> and <switch>. The platform section must be the first
section tag and this section must include the correct platform ID and version. The global
section is optional and includes configuration which is not related to specific switch
ports. The switch section is optional and includes configuration which is related to
specific switch ports.
Module tags: <ip>, <mac>, <port> etc. These tags identify a module controlling specific
parts of the configuration.
Group tags: <port table>, <vlan table> etc. These tags identify a group of parameters,
typically a table.
Parameter tags: <mode>, <entry> etc. These tags identify parameters for the specific
section, module and group. The <entry> tag is used for table entries.
Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values. When saving the
configuration from the switch, the entire configuration including syntax descriptions is
included in the file. The file may then be modified using an editor and loaded to a
switch.
The example below shows a small configuration file only including configuration of the
MAC address age time and the learning mode per port. When loading this file, only the
included parameters will be changed. This means that the age time will be set to 200
and the learn mode will be set to automatic.
< ?xml version="1.0"?>
<configuration>
<platform>
<pid val="3"></pid>
<version val="1"></version>
</platform>
<global>
296
<mac>
<age val="200"></age>>
</mac>
</global>
<switch sid="1">
<mac>
<entry port="1-24" learn mode="auto"></entry>
</mac>
</switch>
< /configuration>
Save: Click to save the configuration file.
Upload: Click to upload the configuration file.
297
Safety Warnings
For your safety, be sure to read and follow all warning notices and
instructions.

Do not open the device. Opening or removing the device cover can
expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. Only
qualified service personnel can service the device. Please contact your
vendor for further information.

Do not use your device during a thunderstorm. There may be a risk of
electric shock brought about by lightning.

Do not expose your device to dust or corrosive liquids.

Do not use this product near water sources.

Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.

Do not obstruct the ventilation slots on the device.
298
299
DISCLAIMER_OF_WARRANTY
This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; version 2 of the License.
This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this Program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
The full text of the GNU General Public License version 2 is included with the software distribution in the file
LICENSE.GPLv2
NO WARRANTY
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED
BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Written Offer for Source Code
For binaries that you receive from ALLNET GmbH Computersysteme on physical media or within the download of
the offered firmware that are licensed under any version of the GNU General Public License (GPL) or the GNU LGPL,
you can receive a complete machine-readable copy of the source code by sending a written request to:
ALLNET GmbH Computersysteme
Maistrasse 2
82110 Germering
Your request should include: (i) the name of the covered binary, (ii) the version number of the ALLNET product
containing the covered binary, (iii) your name, (iv) your company name (if applicable) and (v) your return mailing
and email address (if available). We may charge you a nominal fee to cover the cost of the media and distribution.
Your request must be sent within three (3) years of the date you received the GPL or LGPL covered code. For your
300
convenience, some or all of the source code may also be found at:
http://www.allnet.de/gpl.html
LICENSE.GPLv2
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
USA
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301,
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it.
By contrast, the
GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure
the software is free for all its users.
This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's
software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it.
(Some other Free Software Foundation
software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.)
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price.
You can apply it to your programs, too.
Our General Public Licenses are designed
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish),
that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have.
You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
And you must
show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software.
If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients
to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the
original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents.
We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary.
To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
301
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0.
This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The "Program", below, refers
to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
is included without limitation in the term "modification".)
(Hereinafter, translation
Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope.
The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by
running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1.
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with
the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2.
You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on
the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above,
provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a)
You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
b)
You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under
the terms of this License.
c)
If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when
started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these
conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is
interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is
not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.
If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them
302
as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work
based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless
of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with
a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.
3.
You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
following:
a)
Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b)
Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge
no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable
copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c)
Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source
code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it.
For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable.
However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that
is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and
so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place,
then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in
full compliance.
303
5.
You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works.
by law if you do not accept this License.
These actions are prohibited
Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any
work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and
conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6.
Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these
terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7.
If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all.
For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the
free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have
made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8.
If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add
an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded.
In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
written in the body of this License.
9.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from
time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
304
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the
Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by
the Free Software Foundation.
10.
If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions
are different, write to the author to ask for permission.
For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES
SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best
way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program.
It is safest to attach them to the start of each
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year>
author>
305
<name of
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your
option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even
the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write
to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
02110-1301, USA
If the program is interactive,
make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for
details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General
Public License.
Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and
`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
"copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
`Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs.
If
your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary
applications with the library.
If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead of this License.
LICENSE.LGPLv2.1
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301
USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
306
but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL.
It also counts as the
successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it.
By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.
You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price.
Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and
charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can
change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do
these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to
ask you to surrender these rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients
all the rights that we gave you.
You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that
they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it.
And you
must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this
license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library.
Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they
have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems
that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program.
We wish to make
sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license
from a patent holder.
Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library
must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License.
This
license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different
307
from the ordinary General Public License.
We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit
linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of
the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library.
The ordinary General
Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom.
The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom
than the ordinary General Public License.
It also provides other free software developers Less of an
advantage over competing non-free programs.
General Public License for many libraries.
These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain
special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a
certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard.
allowed to use the library.
non-free libraries.
To achieve this, non-free programs must be
A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used
In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so
we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of
people to use a large body of free software.
For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in
non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its
variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the
user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that
program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
Pay close attention to
the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library".
The former
contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to
run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0.
This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by
the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser
General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked
with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these
terms.
A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright
law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
308
and/or translated straightforwardly into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it.
For a
library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope.
The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a
program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of
the Library in a tool for writing it).
Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the
program that uses the Library does.
1.
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2.
You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a)
The modified work must itself be a software library.
b)
You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and
the date of any change.
c)
You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms
of this License.
d)
If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is
invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not
supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose
remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely
well-defined independent of the application.
Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does
not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.
If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees
309
extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based
on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
3.
You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a
given copy of the Library.
To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they
refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License.
(If a newer version
than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version
instead if you wish.)
Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General
Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
4.
You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the
complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5.
A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the
Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library".
Such a work, in
isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library".
The
executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object
code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether
this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a
library.
The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
310
(Executables containing this object code plus
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under
the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they
are linked directly with the Library itself.
6.
As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with
the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of
your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and
reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the
Library and its use are covered by this License.
You must supply a copy of this License.
If the work
during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License.
Also, you must do one of these
things:
a)
Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library
including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2
above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable
"work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the
Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library.
(It is
understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b)
Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library.
A suitable mechanism is one
that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather
than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified
version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible
with the version that the work was made with.
c)
Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
d)
If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e)
Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this
user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable from it.
However, as a special exception, the materials
to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable
runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system.
311
Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them
and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7.
You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together
with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided
that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is
otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a)
Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities.
b)
This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided
under this License.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as
such parties remain in full compliance.
9.
You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works.
These actions are prohibited by
law if you do not accept this License.
Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work
based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions
for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to
these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all.
For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the
free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have
made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on
312
consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded.
In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ
in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Library specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the
Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission.
For software which is copyrighted by
the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for
this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our
free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN
313
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we
recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change.
You can do so by
permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General
Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library.
It is safest to attach them to the start of
each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year>
<name of
author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser
General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even
the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU Lesser
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not,
write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301
USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
"copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary.
Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs)
written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
314
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement